Home

DTC400/DTC300/DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual (Rev. 1.3)

1. DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 63 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Overlay Print Area tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Use this option to control where the Overlay Panel and or the print area appear on a card Note This option is helpful if for example you would like to omit or block out the overlay or printing around a card s smart chip or Magnetic Stripe By default this option is set to print and overlay the entire card To customize the overlay and or print area select one of the options listed under Overlay Print Area DTCA00M Card Printer Printing Preferences Card Magnetic Encoding Overlay Pairk Aiea Printer Supplies CABO Card ron C Back Em 1 74 m Wit h 4 C Inm 0 07 Arar Directe Cad Travels though Pinter Overlay Pret Secun Optics Full Card Solutions ee No Visual Security E Fa Gyal Oriy C Fer Punt Oriy No Overlay DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 64 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Enabling the Frontside and Backside options Step Procedure 1 Select the Print Both Sides checkbox under the Device Options tab to enable the Backside option under the Overlay Print Area Note This same selection applies to the K P
2. Type Description Card Input 100 cards 30 mil Hopper Capacity Colors DTC400 DTC300 Up to 16 7 million DTC300M Monochrome Dimensions See the Size and Weight information in this same table Humidity 20 to 80 non condensing Interface e LEDs e LCD display e Softkey buttons key ON OFF button operation e Two way bi directional communications o PC based error status messages Memory 2MB RAM Operating 65 to 80 F 18 to 27 Temperature Print Area CR 80 edge to edge Printer Windows 98SE Me 2000 XP Drivers Print Method e Dye Sublimation Resin Thermal Transfer e Resin Thermal Transfer Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Technical Specifications continued Type Description Print Speed Print Speeds 7 seconds per card 514 cards per hour K DTC300M 12 seconds per card 300 cards per hour KO 27 seconds per card 133 cards per hour YMCKO 35 seconds per card 102 cards per hour YMCKOK 35 seconds per card 102 cards per hour YMCFKO Indicates the Ribbon type and the number of Ribbon panels printed where Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan K Resin Black O Overlay F Flourescent Print speed indicates an approximate batch print speed and is measured from the time a card feeds into the printer to the time it ejects from the printer
3. JA Diagnostics Firmmare Updates Step 1 Finer Step 2 Fila File Mame OTS giai fem Firmware Version 1 1 1 10 13 2004 Selecta printer to continue OT CaO Card E readrig Step 3 Ensure that the printer is in Upgrade mode Far Inlemallan en heis te plate the pirita rianprade made elek oh the Hals Butter below Wap inu m DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 19 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Sending the Firmware File continued Fargo Electronics Inc Step Procedure 3 Upon successful completion of the Firmware Update the Printer will restart 4 The procedure is now completed DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 20 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 13 Fargo Technical Support The purpose of this section to provide the User with an efficient step by step procedure to be used when contacting Fargo Technical Support as needed for this Card Printer Contacting Fargo Technical Support Step Procedure 1 Refer to Section 3 General Troubleshooting as needed Contact the Fargo Technical Support Group by phone at 952 941 0050 or by fax at 952 941 1852 for additional technical assistance OR Contact Fargo Technical Support via the Web http www fargosupport com Position a phone n
4. AEEA a roti E o ev Wa cate sont E AAE ETEA A SE Safety Messages review carefully esses enne entren enne enne enet innen nnns Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC30
5. 4f DTC3MM Card Printer Printing Preferences _ FL Card Device Oplicne hagaetirEncedrg 5 Pane Fes Pinter Supplies CRO C Einb 15 Back fiaz he E peH we 5 0 Direction Card Travels thicugh Pinter Print laek wath E Paral Ful Caid Und nad ey eas DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 100 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Print YMC under K and Print K Only options Step Procedure 1 Select between the Print YMC Under K and Print K Only options Note When the Print YMC Under K option is selected all black in the designated areas will print with the Yellow Y Magenta M and Cyan C Ribbon panels directly beneath the resin black K panel OR Select this option if printing resin black text or bar codes onto a colored background to provide a more gradual transition between the two 2 Select the Print K Only option if printing resin black onto a white background to maximize the sharpness of printed text and bar codes Note When this option is selected all black in the designated areas will print only with the resin black K panel Print All Black with E Panel Ful Card Iw Defined Areals Undefined Areals Print MC Under Print Only DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6
6. a Sha fer 500090 Pianra Rader Cod Cesaceg Rellor PARADAN i i i ag Sins Aus pemg ee ee DONE Fons 180067 Ad ze di F Will E0882 Screw FOE 4 Dias EET Peruvian Ind Meter DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 95 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Pinch Roller D900098 Refer to Drawing D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Retaining Ring Pliers Parts Needed Card Cleaning Roller D900042 Retaining Ring 140048 X1 Wave Washer 130951 X1 Estimated Repair Time 30 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Use a Retaining Ring Pliers to remove the retaining ring 140048 from the Card Exit Roller Shaft 6 Slide the Card Exit Gear 810266 off of the Roller Shaft 7 Remove the Wave Washer 130951 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 96
7. TemA Laich Pimi fader a Cond Chess Rallor Je n d CM Pubes aid my X menm EE Hi i h o ach FEES S Tooth i SIdegdate Fass mener i ji aer 12597 Xi EIE E Whe EUN Sow 4 O Ring ally 900106 Perwal ind Meter D200 te DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 61 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Motor and Magnetic Head Replacements Refer to this display for all four 4 Motor replacement procedures in this section See below stepper Motor Assy 0900082 Spring 000231 a Rear Sideplate 0900013 3mm Flat Washer 140040 Hey 0900089 Idler Post 0900037 Screw F OQ 172 Screw FOO01 1 Input Feed Motor Assembly 0900084 Cam Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 S Screw 000192 Screw FOOO1 1 Printhead Cam Ever PCD RFID Antenna Assy 4000365 DTC400 Headlift Screw 000177 Ext Spring F000334 E d Ribbon Take up Motor Assy 0900086 Two 2 Screws F000172 Four 4 Screws F000177 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 62 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 Refer to Drawings D900085 and D900077 Tools Needed Phill
8. DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 27 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Wrong Ribbon Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information Symptom Printer errors out as soon as it receives data from the PC e Printer Error State The Ribbon installed does not match the Printer Driver information e LCD Error Display Wrong Ribbon e Driver Monitor Error Display Wrong Ribbon Card Printer A Wrong Ribbon Installed An ibban het bean installed apa diwal sating is insat Ensure ther the appropiate ria ben bs inet and press Fiesume To cerca dlak an Cancel Punt 7 ax 8 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 28 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Wrong Ribbon Error continued Step Procedure 2 Verify the Driver settings are correct a Open the Printer Control Panel from the Computer e f using Windows 98SE Me right click on the DTC400 DTC300 Card Printer Icon and select Properties e f using Windows 2000 XP right click on the DTC400 DTC300 Card Printer and select Printing Preferences b Click on the Device Option tab Click on the auto select button Check that the Ribbon type matches the Ribbon selected 3 Press on the Resume button
9. Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 40 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Top Cover Assembly includes Print Circuit Board continued Screw FOOO1 78 DTC300 Top Cover 044304 includes Print Circuit Board DTC300 Top Cover 0443047 includes Print Circuit Board DTC300 Top Cover 0443047 includes Print Circuit Board DTC300 Top Cover 044504 includes Print Circuit Board DTC300 Top Cover 044304 includes Print Circuit Board DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 41 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Front Cover D900072 03 DTC300M D900072 02 DTC300 D900072 01 DTC400 Refer to Drawing D900190 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed e Front Cover DTC300 M D900072 03 e Front Cover DTC300 D900072 02 e Front Cover DTC400 D900072 01 Estimated Repair Time 5 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 a Push open the Cover b Gently apply force to the middle of the Cover to flex the Tabs out of their locating holes in the Frontside Plate 3 Remove and replace the Front Cover Continued on the next page 9 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 42 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Front Cover D900072 03 DTC30
10. DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 8 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc D900000 Cover DTC400 DTC300 DTC300 M Baseplate Cover D90011 5 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 9 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Output Part No Description Category Drawing No D900029 Cover Cover D900148 DTC400 DTC30 0 DTC300M Printhead D900064 01 Cover Cover R900100 DTC400 Output D900064 02 Cover DTC300 Cover D900150 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 8 10 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No D900065 01 Cover DTC400 Cover D900151 Input D900065 02 Cover DTC300 Cover D900147 Input D900066 Cover DTC Cover D900148 300 400Rear Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 11 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Fargo Electronics Inc Part No Description Category Drawing No D900072 01 Cover DTC400 Ribbon Cartridge Door Cover
11. seen 8 60 Replacing the Printhead Assembly 0900023 continued seen 8 61 Motor and Magnetic Head Replacements sessi eene nennen eterne 8 62 Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 sss 8 63 Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly E000806 and the Headlift Cam D900075 continued 8 64 Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly E000806 and the Headlift Cam D900075 continued 8 65 Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly E000806 and the Headlift Cam D900075 continued 8 66 Replacing the Input Feed Motor Assembly 0900084 nenne 8 67 Replacing the Input Feed Motor Assembly 0900084 8 68 Replacing the Input Feed Motor Assembly 0900084 continued sss 8 69 Replacing the Stepper Motor Assembly D900087 csssssseseeseeeereeeere nennen enne 8 70 Replacing the Stepper Motor assembly 0900087 continued see 8 71 Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor 0900086 8 72 Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 8 73 Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 continued sese 8 74 Replacing the Magnetic Head Assembly D900050 8 75 Replacing the Magnetic Mod
12. Dye Sub Intensity Resin Heat Front Resin Heat Back et D verla Heat 0 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 44 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Calibrate tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Use the Calibrate tab to a control the position of the printable area in relation to the card b calibrate Sensors and c adjust the internal Printer settings that are customized for every Printer and saved directly within the Printer s memory Cand Printing m Magnet E Panel Fay Cote b 3 Hubo E X aje Brd Trace buyugi Bde ud DUC Coed Prints Printing Priene MagnabeEnisio Dew Fie Cd eta ins Postion a Milia Lr emi AJ A Daci Cad Travels euh Fic mI Fog nn ay Verte EN h F a EE Ged Temi Pih Fn semn DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 45 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Image Position Controls Use the Image Position controls to adjust the position of the overall print area to be precisely centered on a card Step Procedure 1 Click on the Vertical and Horizontal adjustment arrows to adjust the Image Position
13. Part No Description Category Drawing No D900104 DTC400 DTC300 Mis D900110 DTC300M Card Hardware Tray F000337 Spring Mis D900110 DTC400 DTC300 Hardware Gs DTC300M Card o Tray Cr FF uU D840980 Motor Motor D900121 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Ribbon Rewind Motor Only Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 15 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No D900033 Motor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Baseplate Fan Motor D900115 D900087 Motor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Stepper Drive Motor D900087 D900121 Motor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Ribbon Supply Motor ASY Motor D900121 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 8 16 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Fargo Electronics Inc Part No Description Category Drawing No D900092 Output Hopper Cover D900150 044304 Top Cover Mis D900100 044305 Assembly for all Hardware 044306 DTC400 DTC300 044307 DTC300M Card 044308 Printers includes Print Circuit Boards D900084 Card Feed Motor D900077 Motor Roller Assembly DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Servi
14. eese eene Replacing the Printhead Access Cover 0900029 22 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Printhead Access Cover 0900029 continued esee 8 36 Replacing the Magnetic Module Door D900107 sese eene nennen nennen 8 37 Replacing the Magnetic Module Door 0900107 continued sseeeeee 8 38 Replacing the Top Cover Assembly includes Print Circuit Board ses 8 39 Replacing the Top Cover Assembly includes Print Circuit Board continued 8 40 Replacing the Top Cover Assembly includes Print Circuit Board continued 8 41 Replacing the Front Cover D900072 03 DTC300M D900072 02 DTC300 D900072 01 DTC400 8 42 Replacing the Front Cover D900072 03 DTC300M D900072 02 DTC300 D900072 01 DTC400 continued eti oo me cr C ET UR ORE e 8 43 Plate Removal oer Nd on Pt Qu rtc A 8 44 Replacing the Baseplate D900000 sese 8 44 Replacing the Baseplate 0900000 continued esee 8 45 Replacing the Baseplate 0900000 8 46 Replacing the Baseplate 0900000 continued sese 8 47 Replacing the Baseplate 09
15. 4 l 2 Risg 121017 BT ices Vibes BUT Screw FOE A OD Rims 901106 Ind Moder Ete DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 80 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley D900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub D900090 continued See previous page and following pages relating to this specific procedure Spring F000231 Rear Sideplate 0900013 3mm Flat Washer 140040 Pulley D900089 Idler Post 4 D900037 Screw 000172 Screw FOO01 1 Input Feed Motor Assembly D900084 _ Cam Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 Screw 000192 Screw F000171 Printhead Cam Lever D00043 PCD RFID Antenna Assy A000365 SE DTC400 Headlift n j eji Screw F000177 Ext Spring F000334 E Ribbon Take up Motor Assy 0900086 Two 2 Screws F000172 Four 4 Screws F000177 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 81 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley D900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub D900090 continued Steps Procedure 7 Use a Retaining Ring Pliers to remove the Ribbon Supply Hub Retaining Ring 140048 and slide the Ribbon Supply Drive Pulley D900106 and Encoder Wheel
16. Fargo Select a printer rn continue FARGO canted ms Mike Berman L AT ant 3957105 lorary Lode i 2439 554 Cad See C CRID espades Feas note that pricing Iesse mages users the seing defined in yo diver Check Fere settings baloe printing re DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 25 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Magnetic Encoding tab in the Diagnostics Utility Step Procedure 1 a Select the Magnetic Encoding tab to test the Magnetic Encoding capabilities of the Printer b Click on the Auto Fill Track Data button to automatically fill in Track 1 Track 2 and Track 3 c Click on the Encode button to encode the data Click on the Clear button to clear existing data from Track 1 Track 2 and Track 3 W Fargo Diagnostics Utility FARGO mH D7 C300 Card Printer Pict 5 pooler Firnerane Updates hr Sul Tests CadSampe f Enter Data here to be Magnetically encoded to a card Note that the Start and Stop sentinels are not required Tek 1 Track 2 Tiack 3 Aula Fil Track deta Ercods DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 26 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Help button in the Diagnostics Utility Step Procedure 1 Select the Help button to a
17. Replace the Ribbon RFID Sensor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 25 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Invalid Ribbon Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Printer errors out as soon as it receives data from the PC e Printer Error State The Ribbon installed does not match the Printer model e LCD Error Display Invalid Ribbon e Driver Monitor Error Display Invalid Ribbon DTC304 Card Printer A Invalid Ribbon healed dass mabeh ha pinia medal heok tet the leben s correos lor ihe preter ard T e aene dkk an Carcel Fihi DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 26 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Invalid Ribbon Error continued Step Procedure 2 Verify that the Ribbon Cartridge installed is designed for the correct Printer model 3 Press on the Resume button If the issue persists continue to Step 4 4 Remove the rear cover and check that the Ribbon RFID cable is securely connected to the Main Board J 5 and the RFID Sensor e If the connections are loose reattach e Press on the Resume button e If the connections are good or if the issue persists continue to Step 5 5 Replace the Ribbon RFID Sensor
18. 6 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws F000174 that secure the Fan Assembly D900033 to the Baseplate Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 104 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Fan Assembly D900033 continued Steps Procedure 7 Feed the Fan Assembly power cable out of the Printer 8 Remove and replace the Fan Assembly 0900033 Power Board Cover 0900026 Screw 000169 Fan Cable Assembly 0900033 Fan PEM Standoff F000227 Power Communication Board 2000368 Baseplate Assembly D900000 Screw F000174 Rubber Foot 140083 O DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 105 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Pulley Removal Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 Refer to Drawings D900089 and D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Retaining Ring Pliers Phillips Head Screwdriver Flat head Screwdriver Parts Needed Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 1 Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 1 Retaining Ring 1 140009 Retaining Clip 140063 1 Estimated Repair Time 20 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 090
19. C Back T7 LELELELELLELILLLLLL psp Es LA Defined Aes x E Xr lecti Card Travels through Delete r Frnt All B lace wth K Fanal Full Card V Print Y MC under E C Pre DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 86 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Enabling the Frontside and Backside options Fargo Electronics Inc Step Procedure 1 Select Print Both Sides under the Device Options tab to enable the Backside option under the K Panel Resin tab Note This same selection applies to the K Panel Resin backside option af DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences Magnetic Card Image Calor Calibrate YE FEY TY FTO TY eA j Al k i Full Color ves Black Ribbon Type YMC Auto Ribbon Select Color M atching 5 ystem Color M anagemer Resin Dither Optimized for Graphics Y Print Both Sides Disable Printing Split 1 Set of Ribbon Panels Print Back Side First Print Back Side Only Rotate Front 180 Degrees Rotate Back 180 Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Panel Resin Printer Supplies 6 87 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Enabling the Frontside option K Panel Resin Step Pr
20. E PenalAesn Pinte Supplies C Lant Track Selector f Track Tacki C Track Enable MLE 5uspei gt Maonalic Track Opliors Dersky p Character Olset C FE t Bil C NULL 28 BEI fF Blis f SPACE 210 BPl C piis ZERO LAC Generation Character Shit Data Lelt t Even Penly Evan Faik Odd Faiy Dd Panty Default Cancel pol Hab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 50 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Magnetic Track Selection radio buttons Use the Magnetic Track Selection option to specify which track to configure through the Magnetic Track Options if the application requires customization of the standard ISO encoding process Note Although the default ISO Magnetic Track Options should be correct for almost all applications these options can be customized if the application requires it Step Procedure 1 Select a Track selection to a Change all options separately for each of the three individual tracks b Select the Default button for each of the separate tracks to set these options back to the ISO Standard settings once they have been changed Important Please refer to the following for a description of all Magnetic Track Options Magnetic Track Selection 34 Track Track2 Track 3 Enable ML
21. 12 Remove the Power Communication Board See Replacing the Power Communication Board A000368 13 Remove the Fan Assembly See Replacing the Fan Assembly D900033 Power Board Cover 0900026 Screw F000169 Fan Cable Assembly 0900033 Fan PEM Standoff F000227 Power Communication Board 4000368 Baseplate Assembly 0900000 Rubber Foot 140083 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 49 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Clean Roller Plate D900102 Refer to Drawing D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Retaining Ring Pliers Parts Needed Card Cleaning Roller D900040 Retaining Ring 140048 X1 Wave Washer 130951 X1 Estimated Repair Time 30 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly 0900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 Remove the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 See Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 Re
22. 8 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No D900106 Pulley Belts D900110 DTC400 DTC30 Gears 0 DTC300M Ribbon Supply Drive D900047 Pulley Platen Belts D900110 Roller Drive Gears F000063 Belt Belts D900110 DTC400 DTC30 Gears 0 DTC300M Ribbon Supply Drive O Ring Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 6 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No F000092 Belt Belts D900110 DTC400 DTC30 Gears 0 DTC300M Platen Roller Drive Belt F000094 Belt Belts D900110 DTC400 DTC30 Gears 0 DTC300M Platen Idler Belt Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 7 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No A000365 Board Board D90007 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300 7 M RFID antenna E000480 Power Supply Power NA TEITCHIMO POWER SUFPLY ee cum 130063 Power Cord Domestic Cables NA 130069 Power Cord Europe Cables NA
23. Card Deviaa Options maga Colo Calibrate Magnetic Encoding Overlay Print ansa KPanelResin Friter Supplier Card Size Front Bas 2233 r3 X EXIT EX EET bd E NR CS c HI zv Vemm ness SRI E s Brea X Ma Diestion Card Travels Printer Daata io m DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 76 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using Security Options Visual Security Solutions Frontside option only The Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu list will be used to enable and select which type of visual security will be used The Visual Security dropdown list will be selectable only on the Front side see below Visual Security is not an option for the back side The following actions will occur when one of the Visual Security locations is selected e The Overlay Print Area will be disabled e The Security Options become selectable Card DaviceOpliors ImegeCob Caibrale Encoding Oveday Frnt Aiwa K Printer Supplies ER Card Sia Bun Back Card Printer Printing Preferences Secuily Lirelah red Visual Saeuriy Solent E Fa Pint aoe Upper Lef x ry l nerd pu ie Vend ak C Fer Pint Orde No DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual
24. DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 51 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Image Placement problems continued Step Procedure 4 Verify if the Vertical Image Position Setting is set correctly or incorrectly See the graphic below a Adjust the value as described below e fthe white border is on the top edge of the card adjust the Vertical value by 2 e fthe white border is on the bottom edge of the card adjust the Vertical value by 2 b Click on OK Run a self test If the white border is diminished continue the adjustment until it is gone Mike Berman Student 3957105 Library Code 2439 554 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 52 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Poor Image Quality problems All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Photos on the cards look pixilated or grainy as shown below e Printer Error State None e LCD Error Display None e Driver Monitor Error Display None 2 Use high resolution 24 bit color images to always capture an image e ata 24 bit color setting e at 300 dpi e atthe same size that it will be printed on the card as captured either with a scanner or with a digital camera If a small or low resolution imag
25. RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Pinch Roller D900098 continued Steps Procedure 8 Use a Small Flathead Screwdriver gently pry the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing arm D900046 out about 2mm 9 Rotate the Roller Locking Shaft Bushing Counter Clockwise 1 8 of a turn as shown below 10 Remove the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing 11 Pull out the Pinch Roller D900098 12 Replace the Pinch Roller D900098 Caution sure to add the retaining clip 140062 to the new Cleaning Roller before it is inserted into the Printer 13 Reverse to re assemble DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 97 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Pinch Roller D900098 continued See the previous page Spriag Faza Ro Re P Tamh ricis Pimi ORA Coss Rallaren r cru fi rj ES Ee rae N bi co e Foes Sappia MAC PANISI Sf Oues Mos emer 2007 tat 0 8525 BONIS Proin ind Meteor Der te DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 98 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Cleaning Roller Lever D900051 Refer to Drawing D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Sc
26. Rasin Back 7 777777 0 IK i i i i i i i i i i I D Iv Print Both Sides Disable Printing Print Back Side First DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 33 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Resin Heat Back K option DTC300M Use this option to control the amount of heat the Printer uses when printing with the resin black panel s of a full color Ribbon or when printing with a resin only Ribbon by adjusting the Resin Heat slide Note This control can be helpful for fine tuning the transfer of resin text and bar codes Step Procedure 1 Check on the Print Both Sides checkbox or the Print Back Side Only checkbox to activate the Resin Heat Back K slide e Move the slide to the left to cause less heat to be used in the printing process causing resin images to be lighter or less saturated OR e Move the slide to the right to cause more heat to be used a DTC300M Card Printer Printing Preferences AJ xJ Magnete Eneading D verla Area Printer Cad Device Calbrete Riban Preeiium uelau Auto Ribbon Select Resin D tha fer Giaphica Rean Hest T id Hew Back IF Clade ot Tm 04 an ORE LS i fw Pri Both Sides Diseble Printing Back Side Erst Print Back Side Roj
27. Rear Sideplate 0900013 3mm Flat Washer 140040 5 Hey 0900089 Idler Post 4 0900037 Screw F000172 Screw FOO017 1 Input Feed Motor Assembly D900084 _ Cam Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 7 Screw F000192 Screw FOOO1 1 Printhead Cam PCD RFID Antenna Assy 4000365 DTC400 Headlift Screw 000177 Ext Spring F000334 p x Ribbon Take up Motor Assy 0900086 Two 2 Screws F000172 Four 4 Screws F000177 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 109 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Flipper Table Replacement Replacing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 Refer to Drawings D900200 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed StepOer Motor Idler Puley shaft assembly D900089 1 Stepper Motor Drive Belt F00094 Estimated Repair Time 35 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover D90066 to the Printer Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 110 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 continued Step Description 3 Remove the Card Output or Exit Door D900092 and Left End Cap D900064 to the Printer as shown below DTC400 DTC3
28. Print speeds do not include encoding time or the time needed for the PC to process the image Process time is dependent on the size of the file the CPU amount of RAM and the amount of available resources at the time of the print Resolution 300 dpi 11 8 dots mm Supply Voltage 100 240 VAC 6 1 3A Supply Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz System Requirements IBM PC or compatible Windows 98SE Me 2000 and XP Pentium class 233 MHz computer with 64 MB of RAM or higher 200 MB free hard disk space or higher USB 1 1 Weight and Size e Single sided weight 8 Ibs 3 65 kg e Single sided size 7 90 H x 13 62 W x 8 14 D 200mmH x 346mmW x 207mmD e Dual sided weight 12 Ibs 5 45 kg e Dual sided size 7 9 H 18 28 W x 8 14 D 200mmH x 465mmW x 207mmD DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Visual Security Solutions Specifications VeriMarkTM Cards 2 D holographic foil application VeriMarkTM Cards are a low cost customized 2 D holographic foil application that is made in two steps e first step is to emboss a base foil 1 9 cm L x 1 3 cm onto the surface of a blank white card The second step is debossing a custom made dye into the surface of the base foil leaving a customized image logo or text provided by the customer Two separate color foils are used to contrast the
29. Pulley 0900089 Idler Post 0900037 7 Screw F000192 PCD RFID Antenna Assy 4000365 Screw FOOO1 Ext Spring F000334 Ie i Ribbon Take up Motor Assy 0900086 Two 2 Screws F000172 Four 4 Screws F000177 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 71 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 Refer to Drawings D900086 and D900077 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Parts Needed Ribbon Take up Motor Assembly D900086 Estimated Repair Time 10 minutes Steps Procedure 1 Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Inout Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Disconnect the Ribbon Take up Power cable 6 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the four 4 screws F000177 that secure the Ribbon Take up Motor E000806 to the Printer 7 Pull the Ribbon Take up Motor and Hub out of the Printer See the frontend display with this set of procedures 8 Remove the Hub from the Motor Assembly Note The Hub is pressure fit onto the Motor
30. RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Defined Area Option Step Procedure 1 a Determine whether to use the Frontside option via the Front radio button or the Backside option via the Back radio button b Select the Defined Area s option to activate the card grid in the upper half of the window It is through this card grid that up to five 5 Defined Areas can be assigned af DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences ERE Calbrate Printer Supplies Card Device Options Image Coka MecnalicEncading Overey Print Area Panel Resin 80 Size Front 7 Back T A EN OB 0 200 E BIE po x a ME ECC Defined Delete Options pn rn Visual Secunty Seiutiene f For Print and Overlay No Visual C Far very Only E vea Far Prive Orly Ovela E CS docs Ced Bee DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 72 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Defined Area Option continued Step Procedure 2 When the card grid is first activated a small black square will appear at its default size of 2 x 2 5mm x 5mm and at its default location in the lower left hand corner 0 0 This square represents the first defined area e Determine the area of the card needed to define for a signature panel with a different size and
31. Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Cards will not feed off the Hopper continued Step Procedure 2 Check the card quality loading a Remove cards from the Card Hopper b Ensure that the cards are not sticking together by fanning them out and then lining them back together in a straight deck Press the Card Hopper Load Lever down until the Card Tray locks into place Load up to 100 cards into the Hopper with the print side down C d e Close the Card Hopper Cover to release the Card Tray f Press on the Resume button g If the cards do not feed continue to Step 3 3 Press the Cancel Print button on the Driver Monitor Error Display Message 4 Reboot the Printer by cycling the power 5 Check the Card Feed Motor a Remove all cards from the Hopper b Press the Card Hopper Load Lever down until the Card Tray locks into place c Using the Fargo Diagnostic utility send a test print to the Printer See the Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs d Gently touch the Card Hopper Feed Roller to verify that it is turning e If Roller is NOT turning continue to Step 7 f If Roller is turning continue to Step 6 6 Check Hopper Tray Spring Tension a Open Card Hopper Cover b Using the Fargo Diagnostic utility send a test print to the Printer See the Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs c When the Card Hopper Feed Roller engages push up on the Card Hopper Tray g If the cards feed replace the Card
32. Side of Printer A Magnetic Track Data Neue Soda Leading Edge Trailing Edge of Card 4mm Direction card travels through printer of Card Front of Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 114 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Ribbon Tension Option Step Procedure 1 Use the Ribbon Tension option to increase the amount of tension drag on the Ribbon during printing Enter a negative value to decrease the amount of tension that is placed on the Ribbon during printing OR Enter a positive value to increases the amount of tension that is placed on the Ribbon during printing Using the LCD Contrast Option Use this option to adjust the contrast of the LCD Step Procedure 1 Enter a positive value to increase the contrast of the LCD display on the front of the Printer OR Enter a negative value to decrease the contrast of the LCD display on the front of the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 115 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Flipper Home Offset Option Use this option to change the Flipper angle relative to home horizontal position This is done in order to adjust angle of travel to and from the Printer and Flipper Module Step Procedure 1 Enter a negative value to position a card to enter the Printer at an upward angle Or Enter a pos
33. 15 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Barcodes A series of alternating black and white stripes of varying widths each character denoted by a set number and width of black stripes that allows characters to be optically read by a computer Batch print A file sent down from the computer that contains commands to print a number of cards sequentially Battery Back up A power supply that can keep AC electronic equipment running for a short time when power is interrupted allowing enough time for the user to save data and close the machine properly Bi directional A communication standard that allows two way data transfer between PC and Printer BIOS Basic The part of the operating system in a computer that handles Input Output System communication between the PC mainboard and its peripherals Typically residing in chip based non volatile memory Bit An abbreviation for binary digital Each bit is an element of information that can have two states off and on Bit map A graphic produced by an array of pixel elements with the color hue brightness and saturation information stored in bits The more bits the more values and thus the greater variety 1 bit color is black and white 8 bit color produces 256 shades of gray and 24 bit color can produce 16 7 million colors Board A term used for the circuit board a hard mylar pl
34. 15 17 Sensors button 6 48 Serial interface 15 17 Settings button 5 51 5 52 Shift Data Left checkbox 6 59 Shift Data Left option 6 59 SIMM 15 17 Simplex 15 17 Smart Card 15 17 SmartGuard 15 17 SmartShield 15 17 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 16 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Software 15 17 special precautions 1 2 6 4 6 5 7 2 8 4 10 1 Split 1 Ribbon Panels 6 24 Spooler 15 17 Spooling 15 18 SS Start Sentinel 15 18 Stacker 15 18 Standard Resin Black K 2 11 Standard Self test YMC 5 55 Start Sentinel SS 6 61 Stepper Motor 15 18 Stepper Motor Assembly 8 70 8 71 String 15 18 Supply Frequency 2 5 Supply Voltage 2 5 Surface mount 15 18 Switch box 15 18 System Requirements 2 5 T TAC 15 18 Temp file 15 18 Test Core Pins Lam 5 55 Test Core Pins Print 5 55 Test Print option 6 15 Test print 15 18 Tests Magnetic Encoding 5 55 Thermistor 15 18 Thermocouple 15 19 Through hole 15 19 Timeout 15 19 TOF Top of Form 15 19 Track 15 19 Track 2 6 52 Track Data Note 6 62 track number 1 2 or 3 6 61 tracks 6 52 tracks 1 2 and 3 6 62 troubleshoot the Printer 13 1 Troubleshooting 15 19 TrueType TT 15 19 TrueType black text 6 90 U UL 2 2 Eccc Ci Cice CC OG V V Fargo Electronics Inc L GS 2 2 Itra Violet Flourenscing Panel 2 10 ItraCard 15 19 ItraCard III 15 19 ItraCard Stock
35. 3957105 Library Code 2439 554 Printed on a FARGO Card Printer www fargo com DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 46 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Excessive Resin Printing problems All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Black resin text and barcodes appear smeared or too thick e Printer Error State None e LCD Error Display None e Driver Monitor Error Display None 2 Reduce the Resin Heat setting within the Image Color tab of the Printer Driver See the Using the Image Color tab DTC400 DTC300 DTL300 Card Printer Ponting Preferences Als Magnetic Encoding Delay K Pane Fe Printer Supplies Cad Derc Options Cabe Connast a 0 E emma EL nz veosBkme Magerta Balances AERC lm 5 Cangas F ns D ya Bub Inbar 47 Resm Heat IDE C ws DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 47 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Excessive Resin Printing problems continued Step Procedure 3 Reduce the Image Darkness See the procedure Using the Image Darkness Option DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Ser
36. Critical Instructions for Safety purposes Danger A Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or serious injury Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent personal injury refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent personal injury always remove the power cord prior to performing repair procedures unless otherwise specified To prevent personal injury make sure only qualified personnel perform these procedures Caution A This device is electrostatically sensitive It may be damaged if exposed to static electricity discharges Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent equipment or media damage refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent equipment or media damage observe all established Electrostatic Discharge ESD procedures while handling cables in or near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies To prevent equipment or media damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device e g a high quality wrist strap grounded to avoid potential damage To prevent equipment or media damage always remove the Ribbon and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs unless otherwise
37. D900151 D900072 02 Cover DTC300 Ribbon Cartridge Door Cover D900147 D900072 03 Cover DTC300M Ribbon Cartridge Door Cover D900190 D900073 Cover Card Input Door Cover D900148 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 8 12 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No D900107 Cover Cover D900148 Magnetic Module 810492 DTC400 DTC30 Mis D900110 0 DTC300M Hardware Encoder Wheel D900046 DTC400 DTC30 Mis D900110 0 DTC300M Hardware Driver Roller Locking Bushings D900090 DTC400 DTC30 Mis D900110 0 DTC300M Hardware Ribbon Supply Shaft Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 13 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No D900096 DTC400 DTC300 Mis D900110 DTC300M Front Hardware Cover Latch D900097 Card Hopper Tray Mis D900100 Hardware Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 14 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued
38. DTC400 DTC300 DTC 300M Output Mag DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 8 20 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No D900098 Roller DTC400 DTC300 D TC300M Pinch Roller Roller D900110 D900042 Roller DTC400 DTC300 D TC300M Card Feed Roller D900110 A000126 AVA Sensor DTC400 DTC300 D TC300M Ribbon Rewind Sensor D900121 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 21 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the Main Print Board Connections Main Print Board A000297 Location RFID Antenna Assembly A000365 Cable 0900112 J5 Stepper Motor Assembly D900087 Cable D900032 4 pin 4 wire J3 Connector DC Motor s Card Feed Rewind Motor Headlift and Ribbon Drive Cable J20 D900031 6 pin 6 wire Connector Main Power from Power USB Board A000368 Cable D900034 J7 Printhead Assembly D900023 Cable D900035 J16 Color Sensor Board Assembly A000375 Cable D900080 2 pin 2 wire J23 Connector LED Board Assembly A000374 Cable D900114 3 pin 3 wire Connector J22 Headlift Sensor Assembly D9001 13 4 pin 4 wire Connector J9 Encoder and Card Sensor
39. License Number 1176 UL The Card Printer is listed under UL IEC 60950 1 2001 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT File Number E145118 Volume 1 Section 22 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Agency Listings Term Description EMC Standards CE FCC CRC c1374 BSMI ITS EN 55022 Class B 1998 FCC Class B EN 55024 1998 Safety UL IEC 60950 1 2001 CSA 22 2 No 60950 and UL GS EN 60950 Standards 1 2001 Technical Specifications Type Description Accepted CR 80 3 375 L x 2 125 W 85 6mmL x 54mmW Standard Card Sizes Accepted 20 mil and 30 mil 030 76mm Card Thickness Accepted PVC or polyester cards with polished PVC finish monochrome resin Card Types required for straight polyester Agency Safety UL 1950 CSA C2 2 and T V GS IEC 950 Emissions FCC Listings Class A CRC c1374 Class A and T V EMC IEC 801 2 3 4 CISPR 22 Class B CE BSMI Barcodes Code 39 Code 128 B amp C with and without check digit available with embedded font and barcode option e 20f5 e UPC A e EAN 13 e PDF 417 2D barcode and other symbologies available via Windows Driver Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Technical Specifications continued
40. Rev 1 3 6 77 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting Orientation Landscape under Card tab Step Procedure 1 Select the Landscape radio button below under Orientation under the Card Size tab to use the Visual Security Solutions A to D as shown in this window DTC400 Card Printer Printing Preferences AS x Magnetic Encoding Overlay Print amp rea K Panel Resin Printer Supplies Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Card Size inches C mm Print Width 2 114 Print Length 3 370 Orientation C Portrait Landscape DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 78 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu A to D Step Procedure 1 Click on the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu below under the Landscape Orientation see above to use the options shown in this display t Direction Card Travels Through Printer Overlay Print Area Defined Areals For Print and Overlay C For Overlay Only For Print Only No Overlay Security Options Visual Security Solutions Visual Security Upper Lett B Upper Right C Lower Lett D Lower Aight DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 79 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting Orientation Portrait
41. Using the Magnetic Encoder Voltage Offset Option 6 110 Adjusting the Hi Co Voltage Offset 6 111 Adjusting the Lo Co Voltage Offset 6 112 Using the Mag Top of Form Option 6 113 Using the Mag Top of Form Option continued 6 114 Using the Ribbon Tension Option 6 115 Using the LCD Contrast Option 6 115 Using the Flipper Home Offset Option 6 116 Using the Flipper Center Offset Option 6 116 Using the Flipper Smart Angle Offset Option 6 117 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Safety Messages review carefully Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes Danger A Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or serious injury Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent personal injury refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent personal injury always remove the power cord prior to performing repair procedures unless otherwise specified To prevent personal injury make sure only qualified personnel perform these procedures Caution A This device is electrostatically sensitive It may be damaged if exposed to static electricity discharges Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To
42. e Note 2 Be sure to remove any grease off of the Card input Access hole before you insert a new Roller into the hole 9 Reverse to re assemble Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 68 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Input Feed Motor Assembly D900084 continued Stepper Motor Assy 0900087 Spring F000231 Rear Sideplate 0900013 3mm Flat Washer 140040 Pulley 0900089 Idler Post 0900037 Screw FOOO1 2 Screw FOO01 1 Input Feed Motor Assembly 0900084 Cam Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 S Screw 000192 Screw FOOO1 1 Printhead Cam Lever AND PCD RFID Antenna Assy A000365 DTC400 Headlift me Screw F00D177 Ext Spring F000334 d Ribbon Take up Motor Assy 0900086 Two 2 Screws F000172 Four 4 Screws F000177 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 69 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Stepper Motor Assembly D900087 Refer to Drawing D900077 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Stepper Motor D900087 Estimated Repair Time 10 minutes Steps Procedures A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See
43. gently pull the door of the Output Cover Note The Output Door is composed of a durable polycarbonate material and is able to withstand extreme flexibility before breaking 3 Replace the Output Door Assembly 0900092 Continued on the next page Left End Cap D900064 01 DTC400 D900064 02 DTC300 Output Door Assy 0900092 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 32 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Input Tray D900097 Refer to Drawings D900148 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Input Tray D900097 Estimated Repair Time 5 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Open the Input Door 3 Use a No 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws 130984 that secure the Input Tray 0900097 and the Input Cover D900064 02 4 Pull the bottom of the Input Tray out and then down to remove 5 Replace the Input Tray D900097 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 33 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Input Tray D900097 continued Right End Cap D900065 01 Input Door Assy D900073 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 34 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Printhead
44. producing photo quality images with absolutely no dot pattern Resin Thermal Transfer Resin Thermal Transfer is the print method the Printer uses to print sharp black text and crisp bar codes which can be read by both infrared and visible light bar code scanners e Used to print ultra fast one color ID cards on the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Note Like dye sublimation this process uses the same thermal Printhead to transfer color to a card from a resin only Print Ribbon or the resin black K panel of a full color Print Ribbon e Solid dots of resin based ink are transferred and fused to the surface of the card Note This produces durable saturated printing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 8 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Components Front Cover to USB Port Components Description Front Cover Opens to allow access to the Ribbon Cartridge Note This cover must be closed in order for the Printer to begin printing Printhead The component of the Printer that actually does the printing Note This component is fragile and must not be bumped or touched with anything other than a cleaning swab Cancel button The Cancel button gt turns the Printer ON and OFF Note It also serves to cancel the current print job and reset the Printer for the next print job If a card is left within the Printer after a print job is canceled
45. 1 A1280224 The first two digits in the serial number indicate the year the Printer was built e g the letter and digit A1 indicate the year 2001 A1280224 The third and fourth digits in the serial number indicate the week the Printer was built e g the digits 28 indicate week 28 of that year A1280224 The last four digits indicate the sequence number for the numeric order in which the Printers were built DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 13 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 14 Reviewing the Spare Parts List Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Spare Parts List DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M ID Card Printer Recommended Spare Parts List Effective Date June 2004 For current pricing see http www fargopartner com support_services DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 14 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 15 Glossary of Terms Term Definition 24 bit color A color depth for an image that uses 8 bits for each color red blue green combining the possible 256 shades to provide a color depth of 16 7 million colors AC Alternating Current An electrical current that reverses its direction at regular intervals typically 50 60 times a second Access Card The card for the SmartGuard security system A cared with embedded electronics that can be removed from the Printer locking the Printer and preventi
46. 101 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Printer Supplies tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Use the options on this tab to view information about the Ribbon installed in the Printer DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences A31 xl Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Type YMCKO Full Color Fiesin Empty Reorder 44200 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 102 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the Ribbon Information Step Procedure 1 Use the Ribbon information to determine which Ribbon is being used to print with and its part number amp DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences I x Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Type YMCEO Full Calar Hesin Reorder 44200 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 103 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the Ribbon Level Indicator Step Procedure 1 Use the Ribbon Level indicator to view approximately how much Ribbon is left DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences 2 x Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Type YMCEO Full Calar Rezin Reorder 44200 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 104 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Printer Calibration Utility DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Access the Set
47. 11 Printer Components Dye Sublimation Print Ribbons 2 12 Printer Components Dye Sublimation Resin Print Ribbons 2 13 Printer Components Blank Cards 2 14 Printer Module Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 2 15 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Regulatory Compliances Term Description CSA The Printer manufacturer has been authorized by UL to represent the Card Printer as CSA Certified under CSA Standard 22 2 File Number E145118 FCC The Card Printer complies with the requirements in Part 15 of the FCC rules for a Class B digital device Note These requirements are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation If equipment operation in a residential area causes unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception the operator is required to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference ITS EMC The Card Printer has been tested and complies with EN55022 Class B 1995 and EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 and EN55024 1998 standards for EMI emissions Note Based on the above testing the Printer manufacturer certifies that the Card Printer complies with all current EMC directives of the European Community and has placed the CE mark on the Card Printer UL GS The Card Printer has been tested and complies with EN 60950 1 2001 and bears the UL GS mark
48. 2 14 nblocked Sensor 5 33 ndefined Area s option 6 68 6 93 pdate 15 19 PS Un interruptible Power Supply 15 19 SB Universal Serial Bus 15 20 SB Port 2 9 sing Clean Printer Option 6 13 sing the Image Color tab 5 49 V erify data encoded 5 15 ertical Horizontal adjustment arrows 6 46 ertical Horizontal Image Position settings 5 50 Vertical adjustment 6 47 V irtual Memory 15 20 Windows 2000 XP 5 29 5 36 5 50 Windows 95 98 ME 5 29 Windows 98SE Me 5 36 5 50 WordPad 5 5 Wrinkle 15 20 X Y lt lt lt lt lt lt K lt K lt K X and Y boxes 6 74 6 96 Y ellow Magenta and Cyan 6 41 MC 15 20 MCFKO 2 13 15 20 MCK YMCKK Print Ribbons 6 24 MCKH 15 20 MCKK 15 20 MCKO 15 20 MCKOK 2 13 15 20 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 16 5
49. 26 Resolving a Invalid Ribbon Error continued 5 27 Resolving a Wrong Ribbon Error 5 28 Resolving a Wrong Ribbon Error continued 5 29 Resolving a Card Jam Error 5 30 Resolving a Card Jam Error continued 5 31 Resolving a Headlift Motor or Sensor Error 5 32 Resolving a Headlift Motor or Sensor Error continued 5 33 Resolving the Cover Open Error Message 5 33 Resolving the Blank Output issues 5 35 Resolving the Blank Output issues continued 5 36 Resolving the Blank Output issues continued 5 37 Flipper Table Module Assembly Problems 5 38 Resolving the No Flipper Table Module problem 5 38 Resolving the Flipper Jam Error 5 39 Resolving the Blank Output issues continued 5 40 Diagnosing Image Problems 5 41 Resolving the Pixel Failure problems 5 41 Resolving the Card Surface Debris problems 5 42 Resolving the Incorrect Image Darkness problems 5 43 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Incorrect Image Darkness problems continued 5 44 Resolving Ribbon Wrinkle problems 5 45 Resolving Ribbon Wrinkle problems continued 5 46 Resolving the Excessive Resin Printing problems 5 47 Resolving the Excessive Resin Printing problems continued 5 48 Resolving the Incomplete Resin Printing problems 5 49 Resolving the Image Placement problems 5 50 Resolving the Image Placement problems continued 5 50 Resolving the Image Place
50. 5 General Troubleshooting 5 1 Table of Contents 5 1 Safety Messages review carefully 5 3 Communications Errors 5 4 Resolving the Communication Errors 5 4 Resolving the Communication Errors continued 5 5 Print Process Errors 5 6 Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Cards will not feed off the Hopper 5 6 Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Cards will not feed off the Hopper continued 5 7 Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Cards will not feed off the Hopper continued 5 8 Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Two 2 or more card feed at the same time 5 9 Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Two 2 or more card feed at the same time continued 5 10 Resolving a Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Antenna is Corrupted 5 11 Resolving a Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Antenna is Corrupted continued 5 12 Resolving a Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Sensor is Corrupted 5 13 Resolving the Mag Verify Error 5 14 Resolving the Mag Verify Error continued 5 15 Resolving the Mag Verify Error continued 5 16 Resolving the No Mag Installed Error 5 17 Resolving the No Mag Installed Error continued 5 18 Resolving a Ribbon Sensor Error Ribbon Miscue 5 19 Resolving a Ribbon Sensor Error Ribbon Miscue continued 5 20 Resolving a Ribbon Break Jam Error 5 21 Resolving a Ribbon Break Jam Error continued 5 22 Resolving a Ribbon Out Error 5 23 Resolving a No Ribbon Installed Error 5 24 Resolving a No Ribbon Installed Error continued 5 25 Resolving a Invalid Ribbon Error 5
51. 65 Enabling the Frontside option Overlay Print Area 6 66 Enabling the Backside option Overlay Print Area 6 67 Using the Overlay Print Area dropdown menu 6 68 Using the Overlay Print Area dropdown menu continued 6 69 Using the Overlay Print Area 6 70 Using the Overlay Print Area continued 6 71 Using the Defined Area Option 6 72 Using the Defined Area Option continued 6 73 Using the Defined Area Option continued 6 74 Using the Defined Area Option continued 6 75 Using the Defined Area Option continued 6 76 Using Security Options Visual Security Solutions Frontside option only 6 77 Selecting Orientation Landscape under Card tab 6 78 Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu A to D 6 79 Selecting Orientation Portrait under Card tab 6 80 Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu E to H 6 81 Selecting the VeriMark radio button Frontside option only 6 82 Selecting the HoloMark radio button Frontside option only 6 83 Reviewing the Custom VeriMark Card Custom Graphic in a 2D foil 6 84 Sample 1 VeriMark Card Landscape Orientation 4 positions below 6 84 Sample 2 VeriMark Card Portrait Orientation 4 positions below 6 84 Reviewing the Custom HoloMark Card Custom Graphic in a 2D foil 6 85 Sample 1 HoloMark Card Landscape Orientation 4 positions below 6 85 Sample 2 HoloMark Card Portrait Orientation 4 positions below 6 85 Using the K Panel Resin tab DTC400 DT
52. 810492 off the Shaft as shown below 8 Use a Flathead screwdriver to remove the retaining clip 140062 from the Ribbon Supply Hub Shaft D900090 9 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws F000177 That secure the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 to the Printer 10 Disconnect the RFID Sensor cable 0900112 11 Replace the RFID Sensor Assembly 000365 12 Reverse to reassemble DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 82 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Headlift Sensor Assembly D900113 Refer to Drawings D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Parts Needed Estimated Repair Time 20 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Remove the Printer Baseplate See Replacing the Baseplate 0900000 6 Remove the Ribbon Take up Motor Assembly See Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manu
53. Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley D900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub D900090 Retaining Clip 140048 X2 Retaining Clip 140062 X1 Estimated Repair Time 30 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 Remove the Ribbon Supply Motor Assembly See Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 Use a Retaining Ring Pliers to remove the card feed gear 810266 retaining ring 140048 and slide the gear off the Shaft Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 79 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley D900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub D900090 continued See previous page and following pages relating to this specific procedure Tamh ris AN P Sha fer 300080 EM Lo Prediead mee quami ey Ansy MAISI pA EC j Cures eer
54. Assembly D900036 12 pin 12 wire Connector J4 Fan Assembly D900033 J15 Reviewing the Power USB Board Connections Power Board A000368 Location Main Board Power J3 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 22 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Cover Door and Tray Removal Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 Refer to Drawings D900148 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed D900066 Rear Cover Estimated Repair Time 2 to 5 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Use a No 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws 130984 that secure the Rear Cover to the Baseplate as shown in the lower middle left and lower right of the photo below 3 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 23 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 continued Rear Cover 0900066 Screw 130984 Magnetic Door D9000107 Screw 130948 Screws 130984 Screw 130883 Access Cover 0900029 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 24 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 This procedure applies to the DTC4
55. Assembly Problems procedures See the Print Both Sides option in the Using the Device Options tab DTC400 DTC300 section See the Front and Back radio buttons in the Using the Overlay Print Area tab DTCA400 DTC300 DTC300M section See the Front and Back radio buttons in the Using the Panel Resin tab DTC400 DTC300 section Installing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 Step Description 1 A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover D90066 to the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 14 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 continued Step Description 3 Remove the Card Output or Exit Door D900092 and Left End Cap D900064 to the Printer as shown below DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 15 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 continued Step Description 4 a Remove the Cover from the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 as shown below b Place the Flipper Table next to Printer as shown below 5 Connect the Flipper Table Module cable as shown below 6 Slide in the Flipper Table Module pins as shown below 7 Attach the Flipper Table Module pin screw as s
56. Blank Cards Type Description Card Size The Card Printer accepts standard CR 80 sized and 20 mil cards 3 370 L x 2 125 W 85 6mmL x 54mmW with a thickness of 30 mil 030 762mm Card The Printer will print onto any card with a clean level and polished PVC Design surface Although the Printer is equipped with card cleaning Rollers it is very important to always print onto cards specifically designed for direct to card dye sublimation printing Card Suitable cards must have a polished PVC surface free of fingerprints dust or Surface any other types of embedded contaminants In addition cards must have a completely smooth level surface in order for the Printer to achieve consistent color coverage Certain types of Proximity cards have an uneven surface that will inhibit consistent color transfer e Certain types of smart card chips are raised slightly above the cards surface which also results in poor color transfer UltraCard Due to the importance of using high quality blank cards a factory approved Stock card stock called UltraCard is available and recommended for best results e UltraCard stock has a glossy PVC laminate on top and bottom and is optically inspected to provide the cleanest most scratch and debris reduced cards possible e Two types of these cards are available UltraCard and UltraCard III UltraCard stock has a PVC core and offers medium card durability UltraCard IIl stock has a 40 polye
57. Card Karen Atkins Access Level 2 ID 1234478 172355 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 98 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s function continued Refer to the previous procedure SE eae a EET Direction Card Travels Through Printer Print All Black With E Panel Full Card v Defined Area s Undefined Areals DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 99 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s function continued Step Procedure 6 Define another area by clicking on the Defined Area up arrow Note Another 2 x 2 5mm x 5mm area will appear in the lower left hand corner This is the location in which all newly defined areas will first appear 7 a Use the Defined Area arrows to navigate back and forth from area to area Note The active area will always be highlighted with a dotted outline Up to 5 areas can be defined b Size and position each area as it is created because additional areas cannot be added until the most recently created area has been moved or sized 8 Delete an area by using the Defined Area arrows to select the area and clicking on the Delete button Note If all areas are deleted the K Panel Resin options will automatically be deselected
58. Card Device pilos lmageCelr Calibrate Ebbor VEERA Ful ests Black Overlap BTES00 Card Printer zh A The current ribbon selection is correct ak Cancel DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 20 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Adjusting the Color Matching option Use the Color Matching dropdown menu to choose the color matching options which best fits the print job requirements Step Description 1 Select None for print speed versus print color or for use of third party color matching software OR balance adjustments b for more natural looking images without actually utilizing any specific color matching or c for customized printed coloring of the cards through the Image Color tab OR Select Monitor for the Printer Driver to make color corrections similar to the Algebraic option but through a more complex color matching algorithm OR Select System Color Management for Windows to make color corrections This provides a closer match to the sRGB color specifications Note This option shifts colors to a different color model so the colors in the image will more closely match how they appear on the monitor Select Algebraic a for the Printer Driver to make very simple yet fast color DTC400 Card Printer Printing Preferences H 7 Magnetic Encoding Overlay Print Area K Panel R
59. Clean Printer Option continued Using the Test Print button Using the About button Using the Device Options tab DTC400 DTC300 Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC400 Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC300 Adjusting the Ribbon Type option Selecting the Auto Ribbon Select option Adjusting the Color Matching option Adjusting for the Resin Dither Using the Print Both Sides option Using the Split 1 Set of Ribbon Panels option Using the Print Back Side First option Using the Print Back Side Only option Using the Rotate Front 180 Degrees or Rotate Back 180 Degrees options Using the Disable Printing option Using the Device Options tab DTC300M Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC300M Adjusting the Ribbon Type option DTC300M Selecting the Auto Ribbon Select option DTC300M Adjusting for the Resin Dither DTC300M sing the Resin Heat Front K option DTC300M sing the Resin Heat Back K option DTC300M sing the Overlay Heat O option DTC300M sing the Print Both Sides option DTC300M sing the Print Back Side First option sing the Print Back Side Only option sing the Rotate Front 180 Degrees or Rotate Back 180 Degrees options Cue ee CS sing the Disable Printing option Using the Image Color tab DTC400 DTC300 sing the Resin Heat K option Front and Back
60. Click on the Magnetic TOF Calibrate HiCo button to EY argo Diagnostics Utility Hun Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor Run Clean Printer Remove Cards Fun Cycle the Printhead Run Advance the Stepper Motor Ru _ Reverse tha Stepper Motor Run Cycle the Card Input Roller Remove Cards Fun Advance the Ribbon Motor Remove Ribbon orem rmn irpo on i j Rm Magnetle TOF Callbrate DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 22 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 21 Click on the Magnetic TOF Calibrate LoCo button to Fargo Diagnostics Utility gt Ain Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor ___ Rm Clean Printer Remove Cards Rm 1 Cycle the Printhead Min Acwance the Stepper Motor Rn _ Reverse tha Stepper Motor Ru Cycle the Card Input Roller Remove Cards Bun Ribbon Mater Remeve RIBban Run Reverse the Ribbon Drive Motor Remove Ribbon DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 23 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Self Tests tab in the Diagnostics Utility Use these options to run the internal Printer Self Tests Step Procedure 1 Select the appropriate Run button to execute either the Barcode Test Card the Standard Self Test or the Magnetic Self Test as shown below Not
61. Drivers installed on the computer 2 Select the Printer that is going to be tested as shown below Run Calibrate the Feibb Clean Printer Remove Cards Amn Cycle the Printhead Bn Advance the Stepper Motor Aun Reverse the Steppar Motor Run Cycle the Card Input Roller Remave Cards Re Advance the Ribbon Matar Remove Ribbon Aun Reverse the Ribbon Drive Motor Remove Bun Magnetic TOF Calibrate Mica Ru Mlagnetle TOF Calibrate LoCo Fargo Diagnostics Utility FARGO Selecta printer to contine Card Printer x Pics Card Print E Fie Cand Printer Selects DTES1S LE Card Pieter ecu el Pun ID TET Card D TC3QJ Cod Pinter Zl Card PrinlierCLE PEDE Card DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing customized Diagnostic Utility tabs for your Printer Step Procedure 1 Select a Printer from the Printer Selection menu that will customize the tabs that are available Note Only the Diagnostic Utility tabs for the selected Printer will be shown For example the Lamination tab will not be shown if the Printer does not have Lamination capabilities Pango Diagnostics TUM Re Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor Rus Clean Printer Remove Cards Re Cycle the Printhead Re Acvance the S
62. Electronics Inc Functional Specifications This Card Printer utilizes two different yet closely related printing technologies to achieve its remarkable direct to card print quality for dye sublimation and resin thermal transfer The Card Printer will print from any IBM PC or compatible running Windows 98SE Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP The following describes how each of these technologies works Function Description Dye Sublimation Dye Sublimation is the print method the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M uses to produce smooth continuous tone images that look truly photographic Note This process uses a dye based Ribbon roll that is partitioned by a number of consecutive color panels The panels are grouped in a repeating series of these three process colors along the entire length of the Print Ribbon yellow magenta and cyan or YMC The Printer always prints the yellow panel first followed by the magenta panel and the cyan panel Note As the Print Ribbon passes beneath the Printhead hundreds of thermal elements within the Printhead heat the dyes on the Ribbon When these dyes are heated they diffuse into the surface of the card A separate pass is made for each of the three color panels on the Ribbon By combining the colors of each panel and by varying the heat used to transfer these colors it is possible to print up to 16 7 million different shades of color Note This blends one color smoothly into the next
63. Error continued Step Procedure 2 Look for a jammed card in the Printer a Open the Printer s front cover b Remove the Ribbon Cartridge from the Printer c Check to see if a card is jammed in the print station of the Printer d Ifa card is found in the print station continue to Step 3 e If no card was found in the print station continue to Step 4 3 Clearing a jammed card card is jammed in the Printer use the Cancel button and the Pause button to move the Feed Rollers and free the card b The card can then be fed out of the Printer 4 Test the Card Sensor a b Remove the rear cover Using a Digital Voltmeter connect the negative lead to ground Connect the positive lead to Pin 10 of J4 e f blocked the Sensor should read 4 9 to 5 5 VDC e f unblocked the Sensor should read 0 15 to 0 18 VDC If the voltages do not read correctly replace the Sensor Note See the current DTCA00 DTC300 DTC300M Service Manual for related instructions in the Parts Replacement Section DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 31 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Headlift Motor or Sensor Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom The Printhead continuously cycles or does not cycle at all e Printer Err
64. Hopper Lift Spring d Ifthe cards do not feed replace the Card Hopper Feed Roller DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 7 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Cards will not feed off the Hopper continued Step Procedure 7 Card Hopper Feed Roller is not turning during a print job a Remove the Printer rear cover b Ensure that the Card Hopper Feed Motor power cable is securely connected to J 20 on the Printers Main Board c Ensure that the Card Hopper Feed Motor power cable is securely connected to the Card Hopper Feed Motor d Use the Fargo Diagnostic utility to send a test print to the Printer See the Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs e If the Card Hopper Feed Motor is not moving continue to Step 8 8 Replace Card Hopper Feed Motor a Replace the Card Hopper Feed Motor b Use the Fargo Diagnostic utility to send a test print to the Printer See the Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs c If the Card Hopper Feed Motor does not turn replace the Main Board DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 8 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Two 2 or more card feed at the same time All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptoms Tw
65. If the issue persists continue to Step 4 4 Remove the rear cover and check that the Ribbon RFID cable is securely connected to the Main Board J 5 and the RFID Sensor e If the connections are loose reattach it e Press on the Resume button e If the connections are good or if the issue persists continue to Step 5 5 Replace the Ribbon RFID Sensor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 29 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Card Jam Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Card is jammed e Printer Error State Card TOF Sensor is detecting no card motion e LCD Error Display Card Jam e Driver Monitor Error Display Card Jam DTC300 Card Printer Card Jam A cond hae become jared ih lhe printer Piniers Front Cover and rea the FB en ary cade in khe pini by using the Fonsard and or Revere brad an he Tap Cerai Fie nsan he Fil born and Cese tha Pilates Fieri Cover Frers the Resume B uan the Pree Cove lo Continue Printing Ta Lanes the prie Press the Caneel Pial Bullan Warn Dera Cipla Dabog 18 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 30 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Card Jam
66. Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Spooling Rather than moving a print job directly to the Printer the job is written to the disk so that the user can access the application faster while Windows takes care of printing in the background SS Start Sentinel The character denoting the end of a magnetic data string Stacker The device that moves the finished cards onto the output column ordering them First In First Out Stepper Motor A Motor whose shaft turns in discrete steps rather than continuously String A sequence of characters that form a line of data Surface mount A method of mounting circuit elements onto the surface of a circuit board attached at solder pads rather than through holes in the board Surge Protector An electronic device placed in serial to the Printer s power supply that prevents damage to the Printer from electronic surges and electrical current that is outside of the normal parameters Switch box An electromechanical device to which a user may connect several peripheral devices to the parallel port simultaneously yet using the selector switch to designate the active port TAC Thermal Acceptance Composite cards Card stock produced by laminating sheets of PVC with sheets of PET for better thermal distortion resistance Ultra Ill cards Temp file A temporary file generated automatically by Windows to store the in
67. Input Tray Replacing the Input Tray D900097 Use a No 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws 130984 that secure the Left End Cap D900064 01 DTC400 DTC900064 02 DTC300 to the main assembly 6 Remove the Printer Baseplate See Replacing the Baseplate D900000 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 57 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Power Communication Board A000368 continued Steps Procedure 7 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws F000169 that secure the Power Communication Board Cover D900026 to the Printer Baseplate D900000 See below 8 Disconnect the Communication Ribbon Wire D900034 from the J3 Power Board connection 9 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws F000169 that secure the Printer Power Communication Board A000368 to the Printer Baseplate See below 10 Remove and replace the Power Communication Board A000368 See Replacing the Power Communication Board A000368 Power Board Cover 00900026 Screw F000168 Fan Cable Assembly 0900033 Fan PEM Standoff F000227 Power Communication Board 5000368 Baseplate Assembly 50900000 Rubber Foot 140083 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 58 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the P
68. Liquid Crystal Display A device that contains a liquid crystal between two pieces of polarized film through which reflected or ambient light can pass When a current is applied the liquid s polarity changes and blocks the passage of the light resulting in an opaque area of the display The areas are arrayed to form characters LED Light Emitting Diode A semiconductor that emits light when a current is applied Media A generic reference to anything onto which the Printer can transfer an image including cards Ribbon and film LoCo Low The coercivity value of magnetic media between 250 600 Oe Coercivity ISO 7811 2 Fargo s Low Coercivity encodes at 300 Oe LPT Port Line Printer Port The system abbreviation for a PC s parallel Printer port Magnetic encoding The process of orienting successive magnetic bits to produce a serial data string Magnetic stripe An area of the card with an applied or impregnated ferrous material that may hold encoded data through a series of prescribed polarity changes Magnetic Track An area of a magnetic strip running the length of the card with a given width and position constitutes a track This is the area dedicated to one data string restricted to specific rules of format ISO Standards specify three magnetic tracks on the back of a card The JIS standard specifies one track on the front Magnetic Verify A process to confirm proper magnetic
69. Network lesa tee Fimwere Files Places Open se peackenlp DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 16 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Placing the Printer in the Firmware Upgrade Mode Step Procedure 1 A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Press and hold down the Power and Pause buttons on the Printer as shown below 3 Continue to hold down both the Power and Pause buttons as the power is reapplied hold the buttons down for two 2 seconds after the power has been restored and then release Note The LCD display should now show the Upgrade Firmware message as shown below 4 Press the Yes button on the LCD to continue with the Firmware Upgrade DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 17 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Placing the Printer in the Firmware Upgrade Mode continued Step Procedure 2 Ensure that the Printer LCD displays this message as shown below Upgrade Firmware Send File Now DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 18 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Sending the Firmware File Step Procedure 1 Ensure that the Printer LCD displays this message Upgrade Firmware Send File Now 2 From the Fargo Diagnostic Tool click on the Send Firmware button as shown below
70. Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 45 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Baseplate D900000 continued 6 Use the Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the two 2 rear Baseplate mount screws F000170 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 46 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Baseplate D900000 continued Steps Procedure 7 Use a 7 32 nut driver to remove the one 1 nut 130985 that secures the ground cables to the Baseplate 8 Disconnect the Communication Ribbon Wire D900034 from the J7 Main Board connection 9 Turn the Printer over Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 47 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Baseplate D900000 continued Steps Procedure 10 a Use a needle nose pliers to firmly grasp the Card Hopper spring Shaft D900052 as shown below b Use 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the one 1 Card Hopper Spring Shaft mounting screw F000231 as shown below 11 Lift the back of the Baseplate up and then pull out to remove it Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 48 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Baseplate D900000 continued Steps Procedure
71. Replace the Print Ribbon Cartridge b Press on the Resume button If the error continues see Resolving the Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Sensor is Corrupted in this section DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 12 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Sensor is Corrupted All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Printer RFID Sensor does not detect a recognizable signal from the Ribbon e Printer Error State The Ribbon tag information is corrupted or incorrect e LCD Error Display Ribbon RFID Error e Driver Monitor Error Display Ribbon RFID Error 2 Replace the Print Ribbon RFID Sensor a Replace the Print Ribbon RFID Sensor b Press on the Resume button c Ifthe error continues replace the Printer Main Board DTC3040 Card Printer A Ribbon RFID Error The rbisen bag in feematian is eeenanted er ner ect Fieplace ihe Ribbon and presa To aenea olok an Carmel Piht T ox E _ DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 13 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Mag Verify Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Revi
72. Rev 1 3 4 30 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 7 Click Install to begin the installation DTC300 Card Printer InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin Installation Click retal to begin the to review change ary of pour instaletion settings click Back Click Cancel to eit the weard lneallohield DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 31 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 8 Check the appropriate checkbox to select either a single sided or a dual sided printer configuration as shown below 070300 Card Printer InstallShield Wizard Select Printer Configuration DTC300 Single Sided D TESOD Sudi DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 32 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 9 Select the port that your Printer is connected to at this time Click on the OK button and continue with the installation LSB Universal Serial Bus DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 33 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued
73. Rev 1 3 6 55 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the Enable MLE Support checkbox Multi Language Extension MLE support in Windows XP can cause text strings to be broken up into fragments This fragmentation of the text string prevents magnetic encoding Note This option may help correct encoding problems in all operating systems Step Procedure 1 Check this box to allow the Driver to process the fragmented text et DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences x Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Magnetic Encoding Overlay Print Area K Panel Resin Printer Supplies Coercrvity Magnetic Track Selection Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 B Enable MLE Support DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 56 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the ASCII Offset radio buttons Use this option to customize the Character ASCII Offset used to encode the magnetic data on the currently selected track Note This character offset value is subtracted from the ASCII value of each Magnetic Stripe data character prior to encoding on the track Step Procedure 1 Select NULL to change the ASCII Offset to NULL OR Select SPACE to change the ASCII Offset to SPACE OR Select ZERO to change the ASCII Offset to ZERO ASCII Offset NULL SPACE ZERO DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Servic
74. Ribbon Take up Motor Assy 0900086 Two 2 Screws F000172 Four 4 Screws F000177 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 64 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly E000806 and the Headlift Cam D900075 continued Steps Procedures 6 a Usea Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws F000171 that secure the Printhead Cam Lever D900043 See previous page and below b Note the position of the Print Headlift Spring and Cam position Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 65 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly E000806 and the Headlift Cam D900075 continued Steps Procedures 7 a Usea Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the four 4 screws F000177 that secure the Headlift Motor to the Printer as shown below b It will be necessary to manually turn the Headlift Cam in order to gain access to all four screws as shown below 8 Position the Headlift Cam to ensure it is clear of the Headlift Sensor 9 Partially pull the Headlift Motor Assembly E000806 out the front of the Printer 10 Disconnect the Headlift Motor power cable See below 11 Pull the Headlift Motor Assembly out of the Printer See below 12 Reverse to re assemble DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service M
75. Switch can break off 2 If your Printer is equipped with a Magnetic Head Assembly remove the Assembly prior to performing this procedure See Replacing the Magnetic Head Assembly D900050 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 39 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Top Cover Assembly includes Print Circuit Board continued Steps Procedure 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Remove the Card Output Door See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 6 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove two 2 F000178 screws that secure the Top Cover Assembly see previous page to the Main Printer Chassis Note The Top Cover and the Board do not separate 7 Disconnect all the connections to the Main Board 8 Pull the Top Cover Assembly back to release it from the front mounting clips 9 Replace the Top Cover Assembly This procedure applies to these components e DTC300 Top Cover Replacement 044304 e DTC300 Flip Cover Replacement 044305 e DTC300M Top Cover Replacement 044306 e DTC300M Flip Cover Replacement 044307 e DTC400 Top Cover Replacement 044308
76. Utility xj Select a printer to continue DTC320 Card Frinter Fun Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor Clean Printer Remove Cards ___ Advance the Stepper Mater DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 17 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Fargo Electronics Inc Step Procedure 2E Click on the Reverse the Stepper Motor button to move the Card Rollers backwards in the Printer Fargo Diagnostics Utility FARGO OT C300 Card An __ Callbrete the Ribbon Sensor Rm Printer Cards Re the Printhead Rn Reverse the Stepper Motor remove Cards DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 18 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 2F Click on the Cycle the Card Input Roller Remove Cards button to activate the Card Input Motor Note Ensure that all cards have been removed from the Printer before selecting this option S Fargo Diagnostics Utility X FARGO ea conn ATESOO Card Pinter A LDpdares sell Lard Samples Masnelic Encoding An Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor Am Clean Printer Remeve Cards Aun Cycle the Printhead An Advance the
77. added to the magnetic track data in order for the Printer Driver to know which data is to be encoded which tracks to encode when the track data stops and starts and so forth e Manually or automatically added In some cases these specific characters are automatically added to the string of track data by customized ID software applications In most cases however the User must manually add these characters to the string of magnetic track data Entering the Track Information Note If these characters are not added to the track data the text intended for the magnetic track will most likely appear as printed text on the card Step Procedure 1 To avoid this symptom track information must be entered as follows When entering track data the character is entered first followed by the desired track number 1 2 or 3 used to encode the data e The data to be encoded should then follow Note The first character of this data string must be the track s specific Start Sentinel SS and the last character must be the specific End Sentinel ES e The characters or data in between the SS and ES can include all of the valid characters specific to each track Note The number of these characters is limited by each track s maximum character capacity A Caution When segmenting track data strictly use the appropriate Field Separator FS DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 61 RESTR
78. arrows point to within the Image Position window which represents the direction that the printed image moves Rear of Printer Card Output Horizontal Horizontal Card Input side of Printer side of Printer omm Direction card travels through printer Front of Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 47 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Sensors button Use the Sensors button to bring up a separate dialog box for calibrating the Printer s Ribbon Sensor see instructions in the Calibration window below 8f DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preference aja kagrabe Encoding Oveday 7 Print Area Panel Resin Pinter Supple Cad Device Opis mige Coler Caitrais Imaga Postion NT CU M afl Dirseton Card Travels Through Printer gallina Calibration Ribbon Senso Calbraton To calbrate the ribbon esor ramowe ihe Ribbon Cartidge and dose the printer s front cower Chek en the butlan te start When completed the printer wil beep lun SEND DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 48 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Settings button Use the Settings button to bring up a separate dialog box for adjusting the internal Printer settings which are customized for every Printer at the factory and saved directly within the Printer s memory Note You can select the Res
79. based on the card orientation as it exits the Printer b Measure the defined area location based on the printed card Note If selecting the Rotate Front 180 Degrees option the image will appear upside down as it exits the Printer In this case position the defined area opposite to the measurement from the onscreen card design which will appear right side up oo CCC CCE ECCT Defined area A fe E Direction Card Travels Through Printer melee Print All Black with K Panel Ful Card Undefined Area s f Print MC Under C Print K Only DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 96 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s function continued Refer to the previous procedure Card Printer Printing Prefarances E Sti xj Card Device Options z Calibrate Magnetic Encoding Ovom Frm brea f KParelResn f Printer Supplier Card See C Front OC Back Deed Aree UN D rection Card Trovelo through Printer Dalea Print All Black vith Farel Ful Gerd Iw eaa Undefined 9 9 Print rid under P Print amp Only Cancel DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 97 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s function continued Refer to the previous procedure Identification
80. change the appearance of this Tab CA 80 Card Size m lt x ME gt lt DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 94 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s function continued Step Procedure 2 a Determine the area of the card necessary to define In the sample below this area is indicated by the dashed outline b Determine the size of this area by actually printing a card and looking at it in the same orientation as when it exits the Printer 3 Measure the total size for the area and enter those dimensions into the dimension boxes Note The minimum size an area can be is 2 x 2 5mm x 5mm Karen Atkins Access Level 2 ID 1234478 1 2 172355 1 8 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 95 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s function continued Step Procedure 4 a Once the area is sized properly measure from the lower left corner of the card up and over to the lower left corner for the defined area to begin b Enter these values into the X and Y boxes Note The card grid lines are spaced at 2 inch 5mm intervals 5 a Print the card design and note how the image is oriented on the card as it ejects from the Printer Note The location of a defined area is
81. core component of the SecureMark program Using RFID technology SecureMark Media raises the level of customer security and convenience SecureMark Media is used together with the Printer Security CD to convert a generic Fargo Printer to a SecureMark Printer After this conversion the Printer will only accept Integrator specific SecureMark media Ribbon In order to enter the Fargo Secure Print Security Suite an administrator must enter a password and select a Printer The Fargo Secure Print Security Suite consists of the products listed below Refer to the Fargo Secure Print Security Suite User Guide for more detailed procedures Print Notification Application The Print Notification Application gives the User the ability to send an e mail to an administrator when the Printer used during unauthorized hours Security Imaging Application A Ribbon with a fluorescing panel is used to print an encrypted secure code User defined text or a User defined security graphic The secure code can be used to produce the Printer serial number printing time and issue for a given card Print Diagnostics Application An automated report captures Printer status and settings that can be sent to the Integrator or Fargo technical support This report can be easily e mailed or faxed in order to expedite faster service Supplies e Ordering Application This is an on line Media ordering system that enables customers to order their unique SecureMark media
82. directly from their Integrators When they press the order button the destination is their exact Ribbon on their Integrators web site Password Control Application A password stored in the Printer protects a Printer from unauthorized use Password protection can be based on elapsed time to disable the Printer entering a password for each print or entering a password each day DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 3 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Print Security Suite Main Window Here are the icons for the five 5 applications within the Print Security Suite See the Functional Specification section and the Software Instructions section in this same document for more detailed information on these five 5 applications Caution Be sure and save your work in the Printer Security Suite By selecting Save All on the File dropdown menu you can save your work on all active applications Secure Print Gute p SecureMark Media SecureMark Media is used together with the Print Security Suite to convert a generic Fargo Printer to a SecureMark Printer After this conversion the Printer will only accept Integrator specific SecureMark media Ribbon The following is the basic process for converting to SecureMark media a The User installs the Print Security Suite b The CD Installation process prompts the User to launch the Print Security Suite c Th
83. for picture element The smallest element of a graphic Platen The hard rubber Roller that Drives the media through the Printer providing support to the backside of the media during printing or laminating PET Abbreviation for polyester terephthalate often called polyester Sheets of PET are laminated with sheets of PVC to produce thermal acceptance composite cards Port A communication interface serial or parallel used for the transference of data PolyGuard A 1 mil or 6 mil thick polyester material that enhances card security and durability applied over the printed surface with a hot Roller Available as clear or with embedded holographic type security images Portrait A document layout that is viewed with the document s long axis in a vertical orientation Potentiometer An electronic resistor with a variable resistance value that can be mechanically set Print Driver A software utility that serves as an interface between the Printer and the Windows GDI Graphical Device Interface making the Printer s functions available through the software application It also provides the format information for the rasterizing of the print file including any necessary escape or function commands Print Job A file of one or more cards for the Printer to print including image data and Printer functions transmitted through the parallel interface and at times stored temporarily in the print buffer and spooler Pri
84. heat A Caution If the value is set too high the Ribbon may jam or even break Mike Berman stuart 3957105 m Library ode 2439 554 Mike Berman Suden 3957105 Library Code DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 106 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print Top of Form Option Use this option to adjust the lengthwise or horizontal position of the printed image on a card so it appears centered Note When adjusting this value keep in mind that cards always remain in the same landscape orientation while moving through the Printer The diagram below represents how the printed image will move in relation to the fixed card position as a positive or negative Image Placement value is entered Step Procedure 1 Enter a negative value to move the printed image toward the leading edge of the card or the card output to the side of the Printer OR Enter a positive value to move the printed image toward the trailing edge of the card or the card input to the side of the Printer e Maximum Adjustment Range The maximum adjustment range is 127 As a rule 20 equals about 030 8mm which is about the same as the thickness of a standard CR 80 size card A Caution Ifthe negative value is set too high the Print Ribbon may break Rear of Printer Card Output Magnetic Track Data Card input Side of Printer Side of Printer Leading Edge Tr
85. into the Magnetic Module docking station e If the Magnetic Module is properly seated replace the magnetic head as needed Note See the current DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Service Manual for related instructions in the Parts Replacement Section f If data is being written to the Magnetic Stripe the Magnetic Offset may need to be adjusted See the Using the Mag Top of Form Option procedure 6 Verify that the coercivity of the cards matches the Driver Settings DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 15 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Resolving the Mag Verify Error continued DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Fargo Electronics Inc 5 16 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the No Mag Installed Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom There is not a Magnetic Encoder installed e Printer Error State A print job with Magnetic encoding was sent with no Magnetic encoder installed in the Printer e LCD Error Display No Mag Installed e Driver Monitor Error Display No Mag Installed DTC304 Card Printer MW Mag Installed A pirk job with encoding has pant wilh encoder n Iha pimi Ensure hat eacodhig dara 15 belg sent wkh de ant ob end tapir
86. it will automatically be ejected when the Printer is turned back ON Pause button The Pause button is used to pause the Printer during normal operation and also to resume operation after an error condition is cleared Note In general as the icon above this button indicates errors are related to either the Ribbon or the cards If an error occurs the Pause LED will flash Card Automatically cleans cards for higher print quality Note Clean the Cleaning Card Cleaning Roller as needed Roller Card Input Load blank cards into this Hopper Hopper Power Port Connect to the included power cord USB Port Connect to a Windows PC with a USB cable DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 9 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Components Print Ribbons The Card Printer utilizes both dye sublimation and or resin thermal transfer methods to print images directly onto blank cards Since the dye sublimation and the resin thermal transfer print methods each provide their own unique benefits Print Ribbons are available in resin only dye sublimation only and combination dye sublimation resin versions To make it easier to remember which Print Ribbons are which a letter code has been developed to indicate the type of Ribbon panels found on each Ribbon This letter code is as follows Dye Sublimation Yellow Panel Dye Sublimation Cyan Panel M Dye Sublimati
87. magnetic data on the currently selected track Step Procedure 1 Select 75 BPI to change the bits per inch to 75 BPI OR Select 128 BPI to change the bits per inch to 128 BPI OR Select 210 BPI to change the bits per inch to 210 BPI Magnetic Track Options Bit Density Character Size ASCII Offset T5BPI 5 Bits MLILL 128 BEI 7 Bits SPACE v 210BPl BBitz ZERO LAC Generation Character Parity NoLAC Mo Parity Shift Data Left Even Parity C Even Parity Odd Parity Odd Parity Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Character Size radio buttons Use this option to customize the Character Data Size Bits per Character used to encode the magnetic data on the currently selected track Note This character size includes the parity bit if enabled Step Procedure 1 Select 5 Bits to change the bits per character to 5 BPC OR Select 7 Bits to change the bits per character to 7 BPC OR Select 8 Bits to change the bits per character to 8 BPC Magnetic Track Selection Tracki Track2 Track 3 Enable MLE Support Magnetic Track Options Bit Density Character Size m ASCII Offset 75 BPI C 5 Bits NULL C 128 BPI ie T Bits SPACE 210 BPI 8 Bits C ZERO DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual
88. of Flipper angular movement from the home position to the smart card loading position Or Enter a positive value to increase the amount of Flipper angular movement from the home position to the smart card loading position Maximum Adjustment Range The maximum adjustment range is 5 1 is approximately 1 degree DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 117 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 7 Cleaning The Card Printer is built to require a minimum amount of maintenance Nevertheless there are a few procedures you can perform on a regular basis or as needed to ensure the best possible performance Table of Contents Section 7 Cleaning Table of Contents Safety Messages review carefully DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Encoders Cleaning Kit Part Number 085976 Supplies included with the Cleaning Kit Cleaning the Printhead Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers continued Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers continued Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers continued Cleaning the Printer s Interior Cleaning the Printer s Exterior DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Safety Messages review carefully Symbol
89. option to apply to all tracks Magnetic Track Options Bit Density T5BPI 128 v 210 BFI ASCII Offset NULL SPACE ZERO Character Size 5 Bits ie 7 Bits 8 Bits LAC Generation MaLRC Even Parity Odd Parity Character Parity No Parity Even Parity Odd Parity Shift Data Left Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 59 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the ISO Track Locations Review the magnetic encoding Module which encodes onto tracks in accordance with an ISO 7811 2 Magnetic Stripe Note Refer to the diagram below for track locations 0 223 0 353 0 493 fone 8 0 130 TRACK2 0 110 TRACK3 0 110 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 60 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Sending the Track Information Magnetic track data is sent in the form of text strings from the application software to the Printer Driver along with all of the other printable objects within the card design e Magnetic Track Data added In order for the Printer Driver to differentiate between magnetic track data and the rest of the printable objects the magnetic track data strings must be uniquely tagged or added e Specific Characters added In other words specific characters must be
90. sd DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 28 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Exit button in the Diagnostics Utility Step Procedure 1 Select the Exit button to close out and exit from the Fargo Diagnostics Utility Fargo pau Fa Chen Printer Remove Cards Fun Cycle the Printiead Bun Advance the Stepper Motar Fan Reverse the Stepper Matar Bun Cycle the Card Inout Roller Remove Cards Advance the Ribbon Motor Remove Ribbon Bm _ Reverse the Ribbon Drive Motor Remove Ribbon DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 29 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 12 Firmware Upgrades Introduction The DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Encoders Firmware Upgrade Document Rev 1 3 and this section are identical They both provide step by step procedures for upgrading the Firmware on these Printers Requirements e Windows 32 bit Operating System XP 2000 e Internet Access Table of Contents Section 12 Firmware Upgrades 12 1 Introduction 12 1 Requirements 12 1 Table of Contents 12 1 Safety Messages review carefully 12 2 Downloading Firmware 12 3 Downloading Firmware continued 12 4 Downloading Firmware continued 12 5 Downloading Firmware continued 12 6 Downloadi
91. selected 2 Ensure that the Printer LCD says Upgrade Firmware Send File Now 3 Click on the Send Firmware button 4 Upon successful completion of the firmware update the Printer will restart DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 12 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility Step Procedure 1 a Select the Mechanics tab to test Motors and Sensors in the Printer Note This section has a procedure for each function by a Run button as shown below b Seethe entire Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility section for related sub procedures Steps 2A to 2G S5 Fargo Diagnostics Utility X Selecta printer to continue BTC300 Card Card Sampla Enszding Run Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor Rn Clean Printer Remove Cards Ru Cycle the Printhead Run Advance the Stepper Motor Bun Reverse the Stepper Motor Fini Cycle the Card Input Roller Remove Cards Run Advance the Ribbon Motor Remove Ribban Run Reverse the Ribbon Orive Motor Remove Ribbon Run Magnetic TOF Calibrate Run Magnetic TOF Calibrate LoCo DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 13 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure
92. the Lid Sensor tab for damage if the Sensor tab is damaged replace the front cover Note See the current DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Service Manual for related instructions in the Parts Replacement Section b Ifthe Sensor still does not work continue to Step 4 4 Replace the Main Board Note See the current DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Service Manual for related instructions in the Parts Replacement Section DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 34 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Blank Output issues All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information Symptom A card is ejected blank that should be printed Printer Error State None LCD Error Display None Driver Monitor Error Display None Run a self test a b e Note A self test card will be printed Clear any card jams Unplug power from the Printer While holding down the Pause button reapply power Look for an image on the Ribbon a b C d e After a self test has been run open the to front cover Remove the Print Ribbon from the Printer Visually inspect the set of panels that were last used by the Printer If an image is noticeable on the used Ribbon continue to Step 4 If an image is not noticeable on the used Ribbon continue to Step 5 DTC400 DT
93. under Card tab Step Procedure 1 Select the Portrait radio button below under Orientation under the Card Size tab to use the Visual Security Solutions E to H as shown in this window amp DTC400 Card Printer Printing Preferences Magnetic Encoding Overlays Print Area K Panel Resin Printer Supplies Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Card Size CRB inches mm Print Width 2114 Print Length 3 370 Onentation DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 80 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu E to H Step Procedure 1 Click on the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu under the Portrait Orientation see above to use the options shown below o 1 E a ah Direction Card Travels Through Printer Delete Security Options Visual Security Solutions Visual Security Overlay Print Area Defined Areals wi For Print and Overlay C For Overlay Only For Print Only No Overlay No Visual Security d E Upper Left Upper Right 3 Lower Lett H Lower Aight DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 81 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the VeriMark radio button Frontside option only Step Procedure 1 Click on either the VeriMark or HoloMark radio but
94. values e When adjusting these values keep in mind that cards always remain in the same position while moving through the Printer regardless of image orientation e To illustrate this the card illustration shown in the Image Position box will flip and rotate according to the Portrait Landscape or Rotate 180 Degrees selection e The outline around the illustration will always remain in the same Landscape orientation p DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 46 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Image Position Controls continued Review the Image Position diagram which displays how the printed image will move in relation to the fixed card position as positive and negative image placement values are entered Step Procedure 2 Use the Vertical adjustment to move the image e Move toward the rear of the Printer if a positive number is entered e Move toward the front of the Printer if a negative number is entered OR Use the Horizontal adjustment to move the image e Move toward the card output side of the Printer if a positive number is entered e Move toward the card input side of the Printer if a negative number is entered Note No 1 The maximum value for the Vertical and Horizontal adjustments is 100 pixels 10 pixels about 03 8mm Note No 2 The Vertical and Horizontal adjustment
95. 0 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 21 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued Step Procedure 9 Attach the Card Flipper Module to the Printer by first sliding the rear mount pin half way into the rear mount pin slot Next Slide the front mount pin into the front mount pin slot Once the pins are lined up with the pin slots push the Card Flipper Module forward to fully engage the mount pins DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 22 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued Step Procedure 10 Secure the front mount pin to the Printer by using one of the two Phillips screws that were removed in Step 4 Step Procedure 11 Secure the Baseplate mount by using the remaining Phillips screw that was removed in Step 4 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 23 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued Step Procedure 12 Open the Card Flipper Module Cover s top lid and attach its upper latch hooks to the Printer s top cover Next pivot the Cover down into its final position Step Procedure 13 Secure the Card Flipper Cover by re installing the two Phillips screws that were removed in
96. 00 DTC300 DTC300M Printers Refer to Drawings D900147 D900190 and D900151 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed D900064 Rear Cover Estimated Repair Time 2 to 10 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 25 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Left End Cap D900092 Steps Procedure 2 a Grasp the Output Door Assembly D900092 by the sides with your thumb and forefinger Compress the sides of the door by squeezing your fingers together and then gently pull it out b Use a No 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the following e The two 2 screws 130984 that secure the Left End Cap D900064 01 DTC400 900064 02 DTC300 to the main assembly 3 Replace the Left End Cap D900092 to the main assembly Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 26 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Left End Cap D900092 f ja A dla i Cf 12 Screws 130938 Output Door Assy 0900092 Left End Cap D900064 01 DTC400 D900064 02 DTC300 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 27 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Right End Cap D90
97. 00 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 111 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 continued Step Description 4 a Remove the Cover from the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 as shown below b Place the Flipper Table next to Printer as shown below 5 Connect the Flipper Table Module cable as shown below 6 Slide in the Flipper Table Module pins as shown below 7 Attach the Flipper Table Module pin screw as shown below 8 Use the Torx T 10 screwdriver to attach the one 1 front Baseplate mount screws F000170 as shown below 9 Attach the Flipper Table Module Cover as shown below 10 Connect the USB and Power cables as shown below I a DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 112 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 9 Packing the Card Printer The purpose of this section to provide the User with a specific packing procedure for this Card Printer Follow this instruction to pack the Card Printer for transport Step Procedure 1 Clean the inside of the Printer with compressed air 2 Wipe it down with a lint free cloth 3 Clean the Printhead with a alcohol swab 4 Pack the Printer in the original carton and packing materials 5 Ensure to enclose any necessary paperwork test cards etc DTC400 DTC
98. 00000 continued esee rennen 8 48 Replacing the Baseplate 0900000 continued eee 8 49 Replacing the Clean Roller Plate D900102 sess eren nnn nennen enn 8 50 Replacing the Clean Roller Plate D900102 2 8 51 Replacing the Clean Roller Plate 0900102 continued esee 8 52 Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor 0840980 8 53 Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor 0840980 continued sss 8 54 Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor 0840980 continued eene 8 55 Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor 0840980 continued sse 8 56 Board Interface and Printhead Replacements eene 8 57 Replacing the Power Communication Board 000368 8 57 Replacing the Power Communication Board A000368 8 58 Replacing the Printhead Assembly 0900023 8 59 Replacing the Printhead Assembly 0900023 continued
99. 00065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap 0900064 5 Remove the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 See Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear 0900047 6 Remove the Stepper Motor Assembly See Replacing the Stepper Motor Assembly D900087 7 Use a Retaining Ring Pliers remove the retaining ring 140048 from the Cleaning Roller Shaft Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 88 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Card Cleaning or Feed Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 continued Steps Procedure 8 Slide the Card Drive Gear 810266 off of the Cleaning Roller Shaft Caution Use caution when sliding the Gear past the Encoder Wheel If the Encoder Wheel is damaged in any way it must be replaced See replacing the Encoder Wheel 9 Remove the Wave Washer 130951 10 Use a Small Flathead Screwdriver to gently pry the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing arm D900046 out about 2mm 11 Rotate the Roller Locking Shaft Bushing Counter Clockwise 1 8 of a turn 12 Remove the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing 13 Pull out the Cleaning Roller D900040 14 Replace the Card Clean
100. 0065 01 and 02 This procedure applies to the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Printers Refer to Drawings D900147 D900190 and D900151 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed D900066 Rear Cover Estimated Repair Time 5 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 28 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 continued Steps Procedure 2 a Grasp the Input Door Assembly D900073 by the sides with your thumb and forefinger Compress the sides of the door by squeezing your fingers together and then gently pull the door of the Input Cover Note The Input Door is composed of a durable polycarbonate material and is able to withstand extreme flexibility before breaking b UseaNo 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the following e The two 2 screws 130984 that secure the Input Tray D900097 and the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 to the main assembly 3 Replace the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 to the main assembly Right End Cap D900065 01 Input Door Assy D900073 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 29 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 Refer to Drawin
101. 0066 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 Remove the Ribbon Take up Motor Assembly See Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 Use a retaining ring pliers to remove the retaining ring 140048 from the Platen Roller Shaft Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 106 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 continued Steps Procedure 7 Use a Small flat head screwdriver to remove the retaining clip 140063 from the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 8 Loosen but do not remove the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley tension set screw 9 Carefully slide of both the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 at the same time Pulley Mount Plate D900030 Post Idler 0850410 Retaining Ring 140063 Stepper Motor Idler Pulley 0840888 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 107 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley Shaft Assembly D900089 and the Stepper Motor Driv
102. 04 UO ub AERE OR Ru peat 8 108 Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley Shaft Assembly D900089 and the Stepper Motor Drive Belt E000094 continued neat Fette rte eec te a e el e deles 8 109 Flipper Table Replacement cade een avi Ud PU S 8 110 Replacing the Flipper Table Module Assembly 900200 8 110 Replacing the Flipper Table Module Assembly 0900200 8 111 Replacing the Flipper Table Module Assembly 0900200 8 112 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Safety Messages review carefully Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes Danger A Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or serious injury Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent personal injury refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent personal injury always remove the power cord prior to performing repair procedures unless otherwise specified To prevent personal injury make sure only qualified personnel perform these procedures Caution A This device is electrostatically sensitive It may be dam
103. 0M D900072 02 DTC300 D900072 01 DTC400 continued Right End Cap D900065 01 DTC400 D800065 02 DTC300 DTC300M Front Cover Assembly D900072 01 DTC400 D900072 02 DTC300 D900072 03 DTC300M DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 43 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Plate Removal Replacing the Baseplate D900000 Refer to Drawing D900115 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver 7 32 nut driver No 2 Phillips Screwdriver Needle Nose Pliers Parts Needed Baseplate D900000 Estimated Repair Time 35 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 44 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Baseplate D900000 continued Steps Procedure 5 Use the Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the two 2 front Baseplate mount screws F000170 al Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card
104. 0M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Reviewing the Main Print Board Connections essseeseee eere eene eterne nens Reviewing the Power USB Board Connections esses eene nennen nennen Covert Door and Tray Renioval eerte erre recepere ree ien re ene tesi nee enean n Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 sse neret enne nennen trennen nne Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 continued 0 0 cc eeeeseesteenseeeceeeceteesaeeeeeaeceeeceeeeeeeeeeaees Replacing the Left End Cap 0900064 Replacing the Left End Cap 0900092 Replacing the Left End Cap D900092 cee ener nenne Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 sse een Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 02 Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 esssseeeeseeeeeeee eene nens Replacing the Output Door Assembly 9000972 eene nennen enne Replacing the Output Door Assembly 0900092 continued sese Replacing the Input Tray 0900097 Replacing the Input Tray 0900097 continued
105. 1 Magnetic Track Selection 6 51 6 52 Magnetic Track Selection option 6 51 Magnetic Verify 15 11 maximum adjustment range 6 108 6 113 MB Megabyte 15 12 Media 15 11 Memory 2 4 15 12 Menu 15 12 Metallic Resin 2 11 Monitor 6 21 Monochrome 15 12 Monochrome Dye Sub B 5 55 Monochrome Resin K 5 55 Motor Voltages when active 10 2 Multi Language Extension MLE 6 56 N Network 15 12 None 6 21 Oersted 15 12 Offset 15 12 Omit Signature Area setting 6 73 On LED 5 54 5 56 on line Media ordering 3 1 on line Media ordering system 3 1 onscreen card design 6 96 Operating Temperature 2 4 optional Magnetic Stripe Encoding Module 6 50 O Ring 15 12 OS Operating System 15 12 Output 15 12 Output Hopper 15 12 Overlaminate 15 13 Overlay 15 12 Overlay Print Area 6 73 6 74 Overlay Print Area options 6 70 Overlay Print Area tab 6 64 Oversized Cards 15 13 P Parallel 15 13 Parallel port 15 13 Parts Replacement 8 1 Password protection 3 1 Pause button and LED 2 9 Pause Resume button 5 54 5 56 PC Personal Computer 15 13 PCB Printed Circuit Board 15 13 Peel 15 13 Peel Off 15 13 Peripheral 15 13 PET 15 14 Photo 6 22 6 32 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 16 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Pinch Roller 15 14 Pixel 15 14 Platen 15 14 Platen Roller 8 85 8 86 PolyGuard Overlaminate 15 14 poor image qual
106. 1 DTC400 8 42 Plate Removal 8 44 Replacing the Baseplate D900000 8 44 Replacing the Clean Roller Plate D900102 8 50 Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor D840980 8 53 Board Interface and Printhead Replacements 8 57 Replacing the Power Communication Board A000368 8 57 Replacing the Printhead Assembly D900023 8 59 Motor and Magnetic Head Replacements 8 62 Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 8 63 Replacing the Input Feed Motor Assembly D900084 8 67 Replacing the Stepper Motor Assembly D900087 8 70 Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor 0900086 8 72 Replacing the Magnetic Head Assembly D900050 8 75 Sensor Replacement 8 77 Replacing the Ribbon LED Sensor Assembly A000374 and D900138 8 77 Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley D900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub D900090 8 79 Replacing the Headlift Sensor Assembly D900113 8 83 Roller Cable and Fan Replacement 8 85 Replacing the Platen Roller 0900041 8 85 Replacing the Platen Roller 0900041 continued 8 87 Replacing the Card Cleaning or Feed Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 8 88 Replacing the Input Pusher 0900104 8 91 Replacing the Card Feed or Exit Roller D900042 and the Card Drive Gear 810266 8 93 Replacing the Pinch Roller D900098 8 96 Replacing the Cleaning Roller Lever D900051 8 99 Replacing t
107. 10 6 111 6 112 6 113 6 115 6 115 6 116 6 116 6 117 7 1 7 1 Safety Messages review carefully 7 2 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Encoders Cleaning Kit Part Number 085976 Supplies included with the Cleaning Kit 7 3 7 3 Cleaning the Printhead 7 4 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 vi RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers 7 5 Cleaning the Printer s Interior 7 8 Cleaning the Printer s Exterior 7 8 Section 8 Parts Replacement 8 1 Table of Contents 8 1 Safety Messages review carefully 8 4 Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table 8 5 Reviewing the Main Print Board Connections 8 22 Reviewing the Power USB Board Connections 8 22 Cover Door and Tray Removal 8 23 Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 8 23 Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 8 25 Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 8 28 Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 8 30 Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 8 31 Replacing the Input Tray D900097 8 33 Replacing the Printhead Access Cover D900029 8 35 Replacing the Magnetic Module Door 0900107 8 37 Replacing the Top Cover Assembly includes Print Circuit Board 8 39 Replacing the Front Cover D900072 03 DTC300M D900072 02 DTC300 D900072 0
108. 29 Adjusting the Ribbon Type option DTC300M 6 30 Selecting the Auto Ribbon Select option DTC300M 6 31 Adjusting for the Resin Dither DTC300M 6 32 Using the Resin Heat Front K option DTC300M 6 33 Using the Resin Heat Back K option DTC300M 6 34 Using the Overlay Heat O option DTC300M 6 35 Using the Print Both Sides option DTC300M 6 36 Using the Print Back Side First option 6 37 Using the Print Back Side Only option 6 38 Using the Rotate Front 180 Degrees or Rotate Back 180 Degrees options 6 39 Using the Disable Printing option 6 40 Using the Image Color tab DTC400 DTC300 6 41 Using the Resin Heat K option Front and Back 6 42 Using the Overlay Heat O option 6 43 Using the Color Matching option and Default button 6 44 Using the Calibrate tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M 6 45 Using the Image Position Controls 6 46 Using the Sensors button 6 48 Using the Settings button 6 49 Using the Magnetic Encoding tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M 6 50 Using the Magnetic Track Selection radio buttons 6 51 Using the Magnetic Track Options radio buttons 6 53 Using the Bit Density radio buttons 6 54 Using the Character Size radio buttons 6 55 Reviewing the Enable MLE Support checkbox 6 56 Using the ASCII Offset radio buttons 6 57 Using the LRC Generation radio buttons 6 58 Using the Character Parity radio buttons 6 58 Using the Shift Data Left checkbox 6 59 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 V RESTRICTED USE ONL
109. 2A Click on the Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor button to calibrate the Print Ribbon Note This will ensure proper operation of the Ribbon Sensing systems Fargo Diagnostics Utility Fiun Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 14 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 2B Click on the Clean Printer Remove Cards button to activate the function See the Running the Magnetic Self Test HiCo Only procedure Fargo Diagnostics Utility ES XJ Ru Clean Printer Remove Cards DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 15 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 2C Click on the Cycle the Printhead button to verify operation of the Printhead Headlift Motor and Headlift Sensor Note When selected the Printhead should cycle up and down Pargo Diagnostics UtiliEy DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 16 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 2D Click on the Advance the Stepper Motor button to move the Card Rollers forward in the Printer Fargo Diagnostics
110. 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the number of copies Step Description 1 Select the number of copies by clicking on the UP or DOWN arrows as shown below a OTCA00 Card Printer Printing Preferences DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 11 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Diagnostics button under the Card tab Step Description 1 Click on the Diagnostic button to bring up the Fargo Diagnostics Utility window See the Diagnostic Tool Utility section 4 DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences D veau Print Aras PanelHesin Punter Sunpilies Davies Image Coler C alierat Card Size BeA w iwohes C mm 2114 Print Length 3 370 Parrat C Lendicape Caples x 9 Clean Freter Lael ein About Cancel Appl DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 12 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Clean Printer Option Step Description 1 Click on the Clean Printer button to display the Clean Printer Utility window 2 Remove all cards from the Card Hopper and close the Hopper door 3 Open the Front Cover and remove the Ribbon Cartridge 4 Remove the paper backing from both sides of the Cleaning Card 5 Place the Cleaning card in
111. 300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 9 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 10 Board Level Diagnostics The purpose of this section to provide the User with specific Board Level Diagnostic procedures for Board Errors and Sensor Testing for this Card Printer Safety Messages review carefully Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes Danger A Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or serious injury Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent personal injury refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent personal injury always remove the power cord prior to performing repair procedures unless otherwise specified To prevent personal injury make sure only qualified personnel perform these procedures Caution A This device is electrostatically sensitive It may be damaged if exposed to static electricity discharges Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent equipment or media damage refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent equipment or media damage observe all established Electrostatic Discharge ESD procedures while handling cables in or
112. 300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver 4 26 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 27 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 28 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 29 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 30 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 31 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 32 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 33 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 34 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 35 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 36 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 37 Installing the Printer Driver continued 4 38 Printing a Test Print Image 4 39 Printing a Test Print Image continued 4 40 Printer Transport 4 41 Moving the Printer to another location 4 41 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Setup and Installation Choosing A Good Location Follow these guidelines e Place the unit in a location with adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build up e Use the Printer s dimensions as a guideline for the minimum clearances to the unit Note Allow for adequate clearance in front of the unit to accommodate the unit with its Covers open e Do not install unit a near heat sources such as radiators or air ducts or b in a pla
113. 35 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 Remove the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 See Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 85 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Platen Roller D900041 continued Steps Procedure 6 Remove the Printhead See Replacing the Printhead Assembly 0900023 7 Use a Small Flathead Screwdriver to gently pry the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing arm D900046 out about 2mm 8 Rotate the Roller Locking Shaft Bushing Counter Clockwise 1 8 of a turn as shown below 9 Remove the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing 10 Pull out the Platen Roller 0900041 11 Replace the Platen Roller D900041 Note Be sure to add the retaining clip 140062 to the new Platen Roller before it is inserted into the Printer 12 Reverse to re asse
114. 5 L or 53 975 X 85 598 mm CR 90 A card dimension standard of 2 375 X 3 625 0 002 W 0 005 L or 60 325 X 92 075 mm CR 100 A card dimension standard of 2 625 X 3 875 0 002 W 0 005 L or 66 675 X 98 425 mm Cursor The marker in the LCD Display Window that indicates the active selection Darkness A reference to color saturation DB 9 A 9 pin D shaped connector typically used in serial port interfaces DC Motor A Motor that works on DC with continuous motion DC Direct Current Electronic flow that is unidirectional flowing from the positive to negative of a power source Default A setting or parameter that comes preset from the factory in Driver or firmware Performance parameters may be customized in the Driver but can be reset to the factory values usually through the push of the default button The default values for the firmware are usually denoted on a label attached to the Printer Defrag Abbreviation for defragmenting The process of reformatting data on a hard Drive so that it uses space more efficiently DIP switches Dual In line Package Switches A small array of mechanical switches installed on the board that can be configured to change Printer operations including providing a variety of self tests Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 15 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Gloss
115. 8 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Use a Retaining Ring Pliers to remove the retaining ring 140048 from the Card Exit Roller Shaft 6 Slide the Card Exit Gear 810266 off of the Roller Shaft 7 Remove the Wave Washer 130951 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 93 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Card Feed or Exit Roller D900042 and the Card Drive Gear 810266 continued Steps Procedure 8 Use a Small Flathead Screwdriver gently pry the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing arm D900046 out about 2mm 9 Rotate the Roller Locking Shaft Bushing Counter Clockwise 1 8 of a turn as shown below 10 Remove the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing 11 Pull out the Card Exit Roller D900042 12 Replace the Card Exit Roller Caution Be sure to add the retaining clip 140062 to the new Cleaning Roller before it is inserted into the Printer 13 Reverse to re assemble DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 94 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Card Feed or Exit Roller D900042 and the Card Drive Gear 810266 continued Bi d kamiy Tesch Laich al
116. Access Cover D900029 Refer to Drawings D900148 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Printhead Access Cover D900029 Estimated Repair Time 5 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Turn the Printer over and remove the one 1 thumb screw 130883 from the Printhead Access Cover D900029 3 Remove the Printhead Access Cover 4 Replace the Access Cover D900029 Continued on the next page See upper middle left of this photo at DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 35 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Printhead Access Cover D900029 continued Rear Cover 0900066 Screw 130984 Magnetic Door D9000107 Screw 130948 Screws 130984 Screw 130883 Access Cover 0900029 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 36 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Magnetic Module Door D900107 Refer to Drawings D900148 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Magnetic Module Door D900107 Estimated Repair Time 5 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Use a No 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the one 1 screw 180948 to t
117. Backside options 6 87 Enabling the Frontside option K Panel Resin 6 88 Enabling the Backside option K Panel Resin 6 89 Selecting from the Print All Black With K Panel options Front and Back options Selecting the Full Card option Front and Back options 6 90 6 91 Selecting the Defined Area s option Front and Back options 6 92 Selecting the Undefined Area s option Front and Back options 6 93 Selecting the Defined Area s function Front and Back options 6 94 Selecting the Print YMC under K and Print K Only options Using the Printer Supplies tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Reviewing the Ribbon Information Reviewing the Ribbon Level Indicator Using the Printer Calibration Utility DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M sing the Image Darkness Option sing the Print Top of Form Option sing the Print End of Form Option sing the Print Left of Form Option sing the Magnetic Encoder Voltage Offset Option djusting the Hi Co Voltage Offset djusting the Lo Co Voltage Offset sing the Mag Top of Form Option sing the Ribbon Tension Option sing the LCD Contrast Option sing the Flipper Home Offset Option sing the Flipper Center Offset Option Cue C Gia ce sing the Flipper Smart Angle Offset Option Section 7 Cleaning Table of Contents 6 101 6 102 6 103 6 104 6 105 6 106 6 107 6 108 6 109 6 1
118. C300 6 86 Enabling the Frontside and Backside options 6 87 Enabling the Frontside option K Panel Resin 6 88 Enabling the Backside option K Panel Resin 6 89 Selecting from the Print All Black With K Panel options Front and Back options 6 90 Selecting the Full Card option Front and Back options 6 91 Selecting the Defined Area s option Front and Back options 6 92 Selecting the Undefined Area s option Front and Back options 6 93 Selecting the Defined Area s function Front and Back options 6 94 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s function continued 6 95 Selecting the Defined Area s function continued 6 96 Selecting the Defined Area s function continued 6 97 Selecting the Defined Area s function continued 6 98 Selecting the Defined Area s function continued 6 99 Selecting the Defined Area s function continued 6 100 Selecting the Print YMC under K and Print K Only options 6 101 Using the Printer Supplies tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M 6 102 Reviewing the Ribbon Information 6 103 Reviewing the Ribbon Level Indicator 6 104 Using the Printer Calibration Utility DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M 6 105 Using the Image Darkness Option 6 106 Using the Print Top of Form Option 6 107 Using the Print End of Form Option 6 108 Using the Print Left of Form Option 6 109
119. C300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 35 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Blank Output issues continued Step Procedure 4 Adjust the placement a Reset the Printer to clear any Error Messages by removing the power and reapplying it b Open the Printer Control Panel from the Computer e f using Windows 98SE Me right click on the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Icon and select Properties e f using Windows 2000 XP right click the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer and select Printing Preferences c Click on the Calibrate tab d Click on the Settings button e Adjust the Image Placement Setting by 5 f Click on the OK button g Print a self test h After adjusting the Image Placement if a white border appears on the card adjust the image placement back toward its original value in increments of 2 until the white edge is gone i If still having blank card issues continue to Step 5 5 Check the Printhead connections Remove the Printer power and USB cables Turn the Printer over to gain access to the base plate Remove the one 1 thumbscrew from the Printhead cover plate and remove the cover plate Depress the Printhead locking tabs and remove the Printhead Check to ensure that Power and Data Cable that connecs to the Printhead is properly seated Remove the Back Cover Ensure that the Printhead Power Data Cable is properly seated on J16 on the M
120. C300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 92 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Undefined Area s option Front and Back options Step Procedure 1 Select the Undefined Area s option for the Printer Driver to print the resin black K panel for all black found only in the space outside the defined areas Note In the card grid black indicates the area in which the resin black K panel will be printed CR 8U Card Size AREER inches C mm Defined Area i X dh Direction Card Travels Through Printer Melete Print All Black With E Panel T Full Card Defined Area s W Undefined Area s Print YMC Under C Print K Only DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 93 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s function Front and Back options To define an area refer to the following steps Step Procedure 1 Click on the Defined Area s check box Note This will activate the card grid in the upper half of the window It is through this card grid that up to five areas can be defined When the card grid is first activated a small square will appear at its default size of 2 x 2 5mm x 5mm and at its default location in the lower left hand corner 0 0 This square represents the first defined area Note Changing the orientation of the card in the Card Tab will
121. DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 11 Diagnostic Tool Utility The Fargo Diagnostics Utility is designed to provide access to the following e The diagnostic capabilities of the Printer e The internal Self Tests of the Printer e The testing options for Magnetic and E card encoding options The set of sample images to test the Printer s operation Table of Contents Section 11 Diagnostic Tool Utility Table of Contents 11 1 11 1 Using the Diagnostic Tool Utility 11 2 Selecting from the Printer Selection menu 11 2 Reviewing customized Diagnostic Utility tabs for your Printer 11 3 Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs 11 4 Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility 11 4 Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued 11 5 Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued 11 6 Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued 11 7 Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued 11 8 Selecting the Firmware Updates tab in the Diagnostics Utility 11 9 Downloading Firmware Updates Selecting the Firmware File Placing the Printer in the Upgrade Mode Sending the Firmware File Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continu
122. E Support Magnetic Track Options Bit Density Character Sige 4 m ASCII Offset C 75 BPI 5 Bits NULL 128 7 Bits SPACE 21 BPl 8 Bits C ZERO Generation Character Parity 4 C No LAC No Parit Shift Data Left Even Parity Even Parity Odd Parity Odd Parity Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 51 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Magnetic Track Selection radio buttons continued Step Procedure 2 Use the Magnetic Track Selections to configure the way in which each of the three magnetic tracks will encode Note No 1 They do not designate which tracks the Printer will encode e g to encode only Track 2 This must be done through the specific software program Note No 2 Although the Printer Driver will remember the settings specified for each of the three tracks the Printer Driver will always default to displaying the options for Track 1 whenever the Printer Driver setup screen is first opened Magnetic Track Selection Tacki Track2 Track 3 Enable MLE Support Magnetic Track Options Bit Density Character Size 4 r ASCII Offset 75BFI 5 Bits C NULL 129 BPI 7 Bits SPACE i 270 BPI 6 Bits C ZERO LAC Generation Character Parity NoLRC Parity Shift Data Left Even Party C Even Parit
123. FARGO Card Identity Solutions DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Part Number L000533 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 property of Fargo Electronics Incorporated Copyright 2003 2004 2005 2006 by Fargo Electronics Incorporated All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Exclusive permission is granted to authorized resellers of Fargo products to reproduce and distribute this copyrighted document to authorized Fargo customers who have signed a no disclosure agreement regarding the restricted proprietary use of said document The revision number for this document will be updated to reflect changes corrections updates and enhancements to this document Revision Control Date Document Title Number Revision 1 3 1 March 2005 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Revision 1 2 1 October 2004 Same document title Revision 1 1 1 September 2004 Same document title Revision 1 0 1 July 2004 Same document title These reference documents were thoroughly reviewed to provide Fargo with professional and international standards requirements guidelines and models for our technical training and user documentation At all times the Copyright Protection Notice for each document was adhered to within our Fargo documentation process This reference to other docu
124. Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 14 You have completed the installation Thanks you tar chacsing FARGO Farge Incorporated Fargols a registered Trademark of Farge Elactranics Incorporated 0 6 900 p C T aM DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 38 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printing a Test Print Image Step Procedure 1 a From your computer s startup menu select Settings gt Printers and Faxes Windows XP or gt Printers Windows 98SE Me and 2000 b Double click on the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer under the Printers window c Select Printing Preferences under the Printer drop down menu This will bring up the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Printing Preferences window 2 a Select the Card tab and then click on the Test Print button as shown in Display A in this section Note Ensure that the Ribbon is installed before proceeding The correct Ribbon type is selected in the Device Options tab b When the Test Print button is selected an image is copied to the Printer Display A DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Printer Driver Card Tab 01 C300 Card Printer Printing Preferencus e Sj xl Overly Aiea KPanelHesn Firei Supplies mw Device Image Color Calbrabe Card Sige e cies Con Prediki 27114
125. ICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing Tracks 1 2 and 3 in table format Review this table which displays the SS ES FS and the valid characters defined for each track Start End Field Valid Characters Maximum Sentinel Sentinel Separator Number of Characters Track 1 A ASCII 32 95 78 See the table below Track 2 ASCII 48 63 39 See the table below Track 3 ASCII 48 63 106 See the table below Reviewing the Track Data Note Review this Note which displays how track the data should be entered for Tracks 1 2 and 3 Track Data Entry Sending data to Track 1 1 JULIE ANDERSON 623 85 1253 Sending data to Track 2 2 0123456789 Sending data to Track 3 0123456789 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 62 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the ASCII Code and Character Table ASCII Code Character ASCII Code Character ASCII Code Character 32 space 56 8 80 P 33 57 9 81 34 58 82 R 35 No 59 83 S 36 60 lt 84 T 37 61 85 U 38 amp 62 gt 86 V 39 63 87 Ww 40 64 88 X 41 65 A 89 Y 42 t 66 B 90 Z 43 67 91 44 68 D 92 45 69 93 46 70 F 94 47 71 95 _ 48 0 72 H 49 1 73 50 2 74 J 51 3 75 K 52 4 76 L 53 5 77 M 54 6 78 N 55 7 79
126. ICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print Left of Form Option Use this option to adjust the vertical position of the printed image on a card so it appears centered Note When adjusting this value keep in mind that cards always remain in the same landscape orientation while moving through the Printer Step Procedure 1 Enter a negative value to move the image towards the bottom edge of the card See image below OR Enter a positive value to move the image towards the back top edge of the card see image below e Maximum Adjustment Range The maximum adjustment range is 127 As arule 10 equals about 030 8mm This is about the same as the thickness of a standard CR 80 size card Rear of Printer Card Output Card Input Side of Printer Side of Printer Leading Edge Trailing Edge of Card of Card em Direction card travels through printer Front of Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 109 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Magnetic Encoder Voltage Offset Option Use this option to adjust the voltage of the Magnetic Encoder e Encoder voltage is set from the factory at a default of 7 24vdc for Hi Co Magnetic cards and 2 54vdc for Lo Co Magnetic cards e Depending on the cards that are being used it may be necessary to adjust the encoder voltage out of default See the next two procedures for instructions on adjusting t
127. Installation Error Bookmark not defined Choosing A Good Location Error Bookmark not defined About Moisture Condensation Error Bookmark not defined Unpacking and Inspection 4 4 Reviewing the Printer front view 4 4 Reviewing the Printer front view Cartridge being installed 4 5 Reviewing the LCD top front part of Printer 4 5 Connecting the Printer power 4 6 Installing the Print Ribbon Cartridge 4 7 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing Blank Cards into the Card Hopper 4 10 Lowering the Card Output Hopper 4 13 Flipper Table Module Installation 4 14 Installing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 4 14 DTC400 Card Printer Encoder Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit 4 17 Introduction 4 17 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit 4 18 Printer Driver Installation 4 26 Installing the Printer Driver 4 26 Printing a Test Print Image 4 39 Printer Transport 4 41 Moving the Printer to another location 4 41 Section 5 General Troubleshooting 5 1 Table of Contents 5 1 Safety Messages review carefully 5 3 Communications Errors 5 4 Resolving the Communication Errors 5 4 Print Process Errors 5 6 Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Cards will not feed off the Hopper 5 6 Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Two 2 o
128. Institute 15 1 AS400 15 1 ASCH American Standard Code for Information Interchange 15 1 ASCII Code 6 62 ASCII Offset 6 57 AT 15 1 automated Flipping Module 2 15 automated report 3 1 B B Black 15 1 Barcodes 15 2 Batch print 15 2 Battery Back up 15 2 Bi directional 15 2 BIOS Basic Input Output System 15 2 Bit 15 2 Bit Density 6 54 Bit map 15 2 blocked Sensor 5 33 Board 15 2 Boot up 15 2 Buffer 15 2 C Cable 15 2 Cache 15 3 Calibrate tab 5 36 5 50 6 45 Calibrating 15 3 Cancel button 2 9 Card Cleaning Roller 2 9 Card Design 2 14 Card Feed Roller 8 50 8 51 8 88 8 89 8 93 8 94 8 96 8 97 8 99 8 100 Card Feeding Errors 5 7 5 8 5 10 5 12 5 15 5 18 5 20 5 22 5 25 5 27 5 29 5 31 5 33 card grid 6 73 card grid area 6 72 card grid lines 6 74 card input 6 107 Card Input Hopper 2 9 Card Input Hopper Capacity 2 3 card orientation 6 75 Fargo Electronics Inc card output 6 107 Card Size 2 14 card stock scratches 5 41 Card Surface 2 14 cards look pixilated or grainy 5 53 card s Magnetic Stripe smart chip 6 27 6 39 CD Compact Disc 15 3 Centronics 15 3 Character 6 62 Character ASCII Offset 6 57 Character Parity 6 58 Character Size radio buttons 6 55 Cleaning Inside Printer 5 42 Cleaning Roller 15 3 Cleaning the Printhead 5 41 Clear Protective Overlay Panel 2 10 Coercivity 15 3 Color matching 15 3 Col
129. L finas pate tap C mm MERSENNE qi S T C Area 0 0 M X i d Direction Cad Travels through Printer All Black wth Panel a Ful Card Uncielined rea Prinb Y MC under C Pret E Only Cancel opli Help 6 89 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting from the Print All Black With K Panel options Front and Back options Select one of the three options listed under Print All Black With K Panel if the black text or bar codes are not TrueType fonts and or are not printing with the resin black panel Note The Printer Driver will print areas of the image where it finds black coloring with the Print Ribbon s resin black IK panel as specified by each of the following options Step Procedure 1 When none of the options within this window are selected the Printer Driver will automatically print all TrueType black text and bar codes only with the Resin Black K Panel of the Print Ribbon DTCa00 Card Printer Printing Preferences raid Deceptions Image Color Enendeg K Panel Pirta Supelles 0 Cad See Fr Back A Disil Cord Travels euch Pinter Delete Pit B ath _ T Full Car
130. Module Cove Frese tie Resuma bulbon en the Frinta Top Cove to earns pining Ta he pink pats the Caneel Pin boiler Iman the dzalay dialog 130 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 39 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Blank Output issues continued Step Procedure 2 Open the Printer s Flipper Table Module Cover a Clear any cards in the Flipper Table Module by using the Forward and or Reverse buttons located on the Printer s Top Cover Ensure that the Flipper Table Module can rotate freely Close the Printer s Flipper Table Module Press the Resume button on the Printer s Top Cover to continue printing To cancel the printing press the Cancel Print button from the Driver s display dialog Card Printer X Flipper Jam The Fippa has while eher eligaing ilak or flipping s cand Open the Printers Fipaing M edoa Lever Clear any cards the Fllaping Module by using the Formaid andro Revere located cn the Printers Tap Gaver Fraire Het iha Flipser edule Clase the Printers Flipping Module Cove Frese tie Resuma bulbon en the Frinta Cover to pining Ta he pirt press the Caneel Pint bile Iman the Diver s ERN dub 130 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 40 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Diagnos
131. Printer Driver in use as shown in this introductory section Reviewing DTC400 Printer Drivers This section applies to the DTC400 Printer amp f DTCAQDO Card Printer Printing Preference Magnetic Encoding K Panel Resin Piibe Supplies Ced Image Coke Caihiete Card Sige E F Comm Frniwidl 2114 Fir bengi 337 r L C Landscape fum 1 E Diegnostics Clean Pindar Test Print A boil DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 6 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Reviewing DTC300 Printer Driver This section applies to the DTC300 Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Fargo Electronics Inc 6 7 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC300M Printer Drivers This section applies to the DTC300M Printer Note The DTC300M Printer does not provide the K Panel Resin and Image Color tab functionality The DTC400 DTC300 Printers do provide this functionality DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 8 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Card tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Adjusting the Card Size Option Step Description 1 Click on the inches or mm option to choose the desired unit of measurement Note No 1 When designing a card format always set the card si
132. Printhengih 3 370 Diente fcr Poulral Landscape Dopin f Blasgaeensa Cles Pilnie Absit DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 39 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printing a Test Print Image continued Step Procedure 3 This completes the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Encoder Installation Guide For additional help regarding the Test Print and other related items see the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Encoders Service Manual located under Start gt Programs gt Fargo DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 40 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Transport Moving the Printer to another location Step Procedure 1 The Printer can be transported by gripping it under the back lid as shown in the photo below 2 You have completed the setup and installation procedures in this section DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 41 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 5 General Troubleshooting This section provides Troubleshooting procedures for this Printer for Communication Errors Card Feed Errors Print Process Errors Card Jam Errors Encoding Errors and Diagnosing Image Problems Table of Contents Section
133. RICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Flash Memory A microchip based non volatile memory device that holds its data when power is removed This allows for field reprogramming of the Printer commands such as Printer firmware upgrades without the necessity of changing chips Font A character set similar in style and form Fonts can be graphical or mathematical constructs represented by a series of dots or an assembly of curves and lines FPGA Field A microchip with configurable logic circuits installed that is Programmable Gate Array programmed to act as the Printer s central processor Full bleed Printing that covers the entire card surface Gamma The degree of contrast of an image or the display of a monitor determined by the slope of a characteristic curve relating optical density to relative log exposure Glossy Matte A smooth polished surface in comparison to a rougher matte surface Fargo matte cards have a surface index Ra of approximately 65 microinches while glossy have a Ra 3 Glossy PVC A card made of PVC with a smooth polished surface Surface roughness of approximately 0 10 micro inches This is required for direct to card dye sublimation printing Graphical Device Interface GDI A Windows standard for protocol between Drivers and applications and the Windows interface An application uses a Driver to rasterize the d
134. Reject Hopper 5 15 Replacing Headlift Sensor Assembly 8 83 8 84 8 91 8 92 Replacing the Front Cover D900072 8 42 Reset Printer 5 36 Resident Font 15 15 Resin 15 15 resin black K panel 6 90 6 91 6 101 Resin Black Panel 2 10 resin dither 6 22 6 32 Resin Heat slide 6 35 6 42 6 43 Resin Heat Back K slide 6 34 Resin Heat Front K slide 6 33 Resin Thermal Transfer 2 8 Resolution 2 4 15 16 RFI Radio Frequency Interference 15 16 RGB Red Green Blue 15 16 Ribbon 15 16 Ribbon Cards 1 2 6 4 6 5 7 2 8 4 10 1 Ribbon cable 15 16 Ribbon Panels 6 24 Ribbon Sensor Calibration 5 55 Ribbon Type option 6 19 6 30 Ribbon wrinkle problems 5 46 RibbonTraq 15 16 RMA number 15 16 Roller 15 16 Roller Up Down Error 5 33 Rotate Front 180 Degrees option 6 75 6 96 rotate front by 180 Degrees 6 27 6 39 rotates image 6 27 6 39 RS 232 15 16 S safety issues 1 2 5 3 6 4 6 5 7 2 8 4 10 1 12 2 Safety Standards 2 3 Saturation 15 16 second K Panel 6 24 SecureMark 3 1 SecureMark conversion 3 2 SecureMark Media 3 1 3 2 Selecting Orientation Landscape under Card tab 6 78 Selecting Orientation Portfolio under Card tab 6 80 Selecting the number of copies 6 11 Selecting the Visual Security Solutions 6 81 6 82 6 83 Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu 6 79 Self test 5 54 5 56 15 17 Sending data to Track 1 6 62 Sensor
135. Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Remove the Baseplate Assembly See Replacing the Baseplate D900000 6 Remove the Headlift Motor Assembly See Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly 0900085 A Caution The Headlift Ex Spring F000334 may spring out 7 Remove the Stepper Motor Drive Belt See Replacing the Stepper Motor Assembly D900087 8 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the three 3 screws F000171 that secure the Stepper Motor to the Printer See the frontend display with this set of procedures Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 70 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Stepper Motor assembly D900087 continued Steps Procedures 9 Push the Stepper Motor into the Motor cavity 10 Disconnect the Stepper Motor Power Cable 11 Replace the Stepper Motor Assembly 0900087 12 Reverse to re assemble 3mm Flat Washer 140040 Screw F000172 Screw FOO017 1 Input Feed Motor Assembly 0900084 Cam Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 Screw FOOO1 1 Printhead Cam Lever D900043 DT C400 Headlift Spring F000231 Rear Sideplate 0900013
136. Roller D900040 See Replacing the Card Clean Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 Caution Be sure to add the retaining clip 140062 to the new Cleaning Roller before it is inserted into the Printer 15 Reverse to re assemble DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 3 8 89 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Card Cleaning or Feed Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 continued Spring aia Pinch Ros TOON be n 4 ricis Coney eo mh al Pisa adier Gey jj Cand Clezazag Fallor IO j Pa Fa a EN d C700 Supahy Sha fer bie se 500090 lx x 5 o e a i ai E Cad Faed Aoli MoH 1 Rasy P SSSR Ate 12900077 ran ENTE pamar Whi Ear 0 855 ry DINDE Peruvind Ind Meter DEMETRII DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 90 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Input Pusher D900104 Refer to Drawings D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Parts Needed Estimated Repair Time 15 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Doo
137. STRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers continued Step Procedure 2 Remove all the cards from the Printer s Input Hopper 3 Use the Cleaning Card from the Printer s and remove the adhesive backing from both sides of the card Note If your Printer has a Magnetic Encoder installed be sure to leave the small Liner Strip on top of the Cleaning Card in place This small strip is needed to protect the Magnetic Head from the adhesives on the Cleaning Card DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers continued Step Procedure 4 Insert the Cleaning Card into the Single Feed Card Slot until the card stops Note If your Printer is equipped with a Magnetic Encoder you must insert the Cleaning Card with the printed side up and with the small Liner Strip towards the front of the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 7 7 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers continued Step Procedure 5 From your computer open the Printer Driver and select either Properties if you are using Windows 98SE Me or Printing Preferences if you are using Windows 2000 XP 6 Click on the Clean Printer button 7 Click on the Clean button Note
138. Shaft It may require some force to remove it 9 Reverse to re assemble Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 72 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 continued See lower right of display u AIT Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 73 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 continued Spring F000231 Rear Sideplate D900013 3mm Flat Washer 140040 0900089 Idler Post 0900037 Screw 000172 Screw FOOO17 1 Input Feed Motor Assembly 0900084 Cam Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 Screw 000192 Screw F UO171 Printhead Cam pe PCD RFID Antenna Assy A000365 DTC400 Headlift Screw F000177 Ext Spring 000334 ew f yin Ribbon Take up Motor Assy 0900086 p M OoIIOO UO U o xj Two 2 Screws F000172 Four 4 Screws 000177 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 74 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Magnetic Head Assembly D900050 Refer to Drawing D900148 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Parts Needed Magnetic Encoding Module D900050 Estimated Repair Time 5 minu
139. Step Procedure 10 a Connect the USB cable to the Printer b Turn ON the Printer at this time if it is not already ON Im and Play DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 34 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 11 Wait while the Driver components are being copied to your PC Plug and Play DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 35 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 12 Click on the Finish button to complete the Setup as shown below Fargo Printer Driver Setup Installshield Wizard Complete Setup has hinished the Fargo Printer Onver Soflyaaie and Online User s Guide on your compuler Click the Finish button to complete he DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 36 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 13 a Click on the Yes button to exit the installer as shown below b Click on the No button to return to the installer s main menu to install additional software components instalation Complete Would you like to exit the Installer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 37 RESTRICTED USE ONLY
140. Step 6 After the Cover is secure re attach the Card Hopper DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 24 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued Step Procedure 14 Secure the Printer s Rear Cover by re installing the two Phillips screws that were removed in Step 2 Step Procedure 15 Connect the Printers Power and USB cables DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 25 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Driver Installation Installing the Printer Driver Step Procedure 1 Close all programs and insert the Software Installation CD into your computer s CD drive After a few seconds the CD s installer program will automatically open Follow the CD s on screen Procedures to complete installation Note If the CD does not automatically open use My Computer or Windows Explorer to view the contents of the CD Then double click on the Setup exe file listed on the CD 2 Click on the following buttons to install the appropriate Printer Driver and Online User s Guide as shown below e INSTALL button for the DTC400 Card Printer Encoder e INSTALL button for the DTC300 Card Printer Encoder e INSTALL button for the DTC300M Card Printer Encoder Click on the Install button for your printer 28 begin i
141. Stepper Motor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 19 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 2F Click on the Advance the Ribbon Motor Remove Ribbon button to Farga Diagnostics Utility FARGO Select a printer to continue Card Printer Flirnesana Updates Hun Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor Aan Clean Printer Remove Cards Bun Cycle the Printhead Aun Advance the Stepper Matar fin Reverse the Stepper Motor Aur Advance the Ribbon Motor Remove Ribbon reer eter merece DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 20 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 2G Click on the Reverse the Ribbon Drive Motor Remove Ribbon button to EY argo Diagnostics Utility Hun Calibrate the Ribbon Sensor Rn Clean Printer Remove Cards Run Cycle the Printhead Ruts Advance the Stepper Motor Rn __ Reverse tha Stepper Mator Ru Cycle the Card Input Roller Remove Cards DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 21 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 2H
142. TC300 Print Driver Options 6 6 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 iv RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 and DTC300M Printer Drivers 6 6 Reviewing DTC400 Printer Drivers 6 6 Reviewing DTC300 Printer Driver 6 7 Reviewing DTC300M Printer Drivers 6 8 Using the Card tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M 6 9 Adjusting the Card Size Option 6 9 Adjusting the Orientation Option 6 10 Selecting the number of copies 6 11 Using the Diagnostics button under the Card tab 6 12 Using the Clean Printer Option 6 13 Using the Test Print button 6 15 Using the About button 6 16 Using the Device Options tab DTC400 DTC300 6 17 Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC400 6 17 Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC300 6 18 Adjusting the Ribbon Type option 6 19 Selecting the Auto Ribbon Select option 6 20 Adjusting the Color Matching option 6 21 Adjusting for the Resin Dither 6 22 Using the Print Both Sides option 6 23 Using the Split 1 Set of Ribbon Panels option 6 24 Using the Print Back Side First option 6 25 Using the Print Back Side Only option 6 26 Using the Rotate Front 180 Degrees or Rotate Back 180 Degrees options 6 27 Using the Disable Printing option 6 28 Using the Device Options tab DTC300M 6 29 Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC300M 6
143. TED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Adjusting the Lo Co Voltage Offset Step Procedure 1 Identify the Magnetic Encoder voltage required by the cards Note The required encoder voltage for the cards will need to be known in order to properly set the Encoder Voltage Offset value This information should be available through the card manufacturer or reseller 2 Use the following equation to identify the proper Mag Lo Co Voltage Offset value e 36500 lt Desired Voltage gt 4 6 1 23 1 2670 39 0625 126 X 1 For example Required Encoder Voltage 1 5vdc 36500 1 5 4 6 1 23 1 2670 39 0625 126 X 1 42 3 Change the Mag Lo Co Voltage Offset value I E 42 4 Use the Diagnostic Utility to run a Magnetic Self test and verify encoded quality Image Darkness cm Print Top of Form Pini End of Fon p e y ip bo MagHiCovotage Oise fo fp estote vetas one E Maa otFom Oooo hp hb pon ej oj DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 112 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Mag Top of Form Option Use this option only if the Printer has a built in Magnetic Stripe encoder Note If so use this option to shift the starting point of where the Printer will begin encoding the magnetic track data on a card s Magnetic Stripe When adjusting this value keep in mind that a c
144. The Printer will pull in the Cleaning Card The Printer will then perform an automated cleaning procedure This procedure is designed to thoroughly clean the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers inside the Printer Clean Printer Cleaning the Printer s Interior Periodically use a Cleaning Pad from the Printer s Cleaning Kit to remove dust and other contaminants from inside the Printer Note Dust and other particles may accumulate inside the Printer with continued usage This can cause spots or specks to appear on the printed cards Cleaning the Printer s Exterior Clean it only with a Cleaning Pad from the Printer s Cleaning Kit Note The Printer has a durable casing that should retain its luster and appearance for many years DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 7 8 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 8 Parts Replacement This Section describes the replacement of key components of this Card Printer Step Procedure 1 Be sure to reverse the disassembly steps to reassemble the Card Printer A Caution Be careful when replacing components to avoid breaking or cracking plastic encasing or components Only use those tools that are specified for the procedure Do not use additional power tools that might crack or break a plastic encasing or component Table of Contents Section 8 Parts Replacement eee aa ias Table OF COMMIS
145. To prevent personal injury make sure only qualified personnel perform these procedures Caution A This device is electrostatically sensitive It may be damaged if exposed to static electricity discharges Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent equipment or media damage refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent equipment or media damage observe all established Electrostatic Discharge ESD procedures while handling cables in or near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies To prevent equipment or media damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device e g a high quality wrist strap grounded to avoid potential damage To prevent equipment or media damage always remove the Ribbon and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs unless otherwise specified To prevent equipment or media damage take jewelry off of fingers and hands as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris before working on the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc DTC400 DTC300 Print Driver Options Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 and DTC300M Printer Drivers The functionality of the DTC400 DTC300 and DTC300M Printer Drivers is identical The window title reflects the specific
146. U Using the Overlay Heat O option Using the Color Matching option and Default button Using the Calibrate tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Image Position Controls 6 46 Using the Image Position Controls continued 6 47 Using the Sensors button 6 48 Using the Settings button 6 49 Using the Magnetic Encoding tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M 6 50 Using the Magnetic Track Selection radio buttons 6 51 Using the Magnetic Track Selection radio buttons continued 6 52 Using the Magnetic Track Options radio buttons 6 53 Using the Bit Density radio buttons 6 54 Using the Character Size radio buttons 6 55 Reviewing the Enable MLE Support checkbox 6 56 Using the ASCII Offset radio buttons 6 57 Using the LRC Generation radio buttons 6 58 Using the Character Parity radio buttons 6 58 Using the Shift Data Left checkbox 6 59 Reviewing the ISO Track Locations 6 60 Sending the Track Information 6 61 Entering the Track Information 6 61 Reviewing Tracks 1 2 and 3 in table format 6 62 Reviewing the Track Data Note 6 62 Reviewing the ASCII Code and Character Table 6 63 Using the Overlay Print Area tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M 6 64 Enabling the Frontside and Backside options 6
147. Y Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the ISO Track Locations 6 60 Sending the Track Information 6 61 Entering the Track Information 6 61 Reviewing Tracks 1 2 and 3 in table format 6 62 Reviewing the Track Data Note 6 62 Reviewing the ASCII Code and Character Table 6 63 Using the Overlay Print Area tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M 6 64 Enabling the Frontside and Backside options 6 65 Enabling the Frontside option Overlay Print Area 6 66 Enabling the Backside option Overlay Print Area 6 67 Using the Overlay Print Area dropdown menu 6 68 Using the Overlay Print Area 6 70 Using the Defined Area Option 6 72 Using Security Options Visual Security Solutions Frontside option only 6 77 Selecting Orientation Landscape under Card tab 6 78 Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu A to D 6 79 Selecting Orientation Portrait under Card tab 6 80 Selecting the Visual Security Solutions dropdown menu E to H 6 81 Selecting the VeriMark radio button Frontside option only 6 82 Selecting the HoloMark radio button Frontside option only 6 83 Reviewing the Custom VeriMark Card Custom Graphic in a 2D foil 6 84 Reviewing the Custom HoloMark Card Custom Graphic in a 2D foil 6 85 Using the K Panel Resin tab DTC400 DTC300 6 86 Enabling the Frontside and
148. a and Cyan Note In most cases the default settings of these options will suffice 2 Control the overall darkness and lightness of the printed image by adjusting the Dye Sub Intensity slide by clicking and dragging the slide e Move the slide to the left to cause less heat to be used in the printing process thus generating a lighter print OR e Move the slide to the right to cause more heat to be used thus generating a darker print Note This slide only affects those images printed with dye sublimation Ribbon panels YMC af Card Printer Printing Preferences tl Magnetic Eneading Print Ara E Panel Printer 5 Cad Ootlens Image Cole Yellow Bainos Balance Cyan Balance nbena ais DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 41 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Resin Heat K option Front and Back Use this option to control the amount of heat the Printer uses when printing with the resin black panel s of a full color Ribbon or when printing with a resin only Ribbon by adjusting the Resin Heat slide Step Procedure 1 Adjust the Resin Heat Front K or the Resin Head Back K as needed e Move the slide to the left to cause less heat to be used in the printing process causing resin images to be lighter or less saturated OR e Move the slide to t
149. able D900035 from the Printhead D900023 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 102 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Printhead Cable Assembly D900035 continued Steps Procedure 8 Place the Printer back on its feet and disconnect the Printhead Data Cable from the Main Board 9 Remove and replace the Printhead Data Cable Stren Fee 7 bo m 0900074 Frame 2900060 Screw 120312 T ees Thumb Soom 1208863 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 103 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Fan Assembly D900033 Refer to Drawing D900115 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Fan Assembly D900033 Estimated Repair Time 30 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly 0900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Remove the Printer Baseplate See Replacing the Printhead Assembly D900023
150. adele colt aunties denen e Der ege 8 85 Replacing the Platen Roller D900041 esses enne nnne nnnm nnne nennen 8 85 Refer to Drawing D9001 TO sisenemise 8 85 Replacing the Platen Roller 0900041 continued seen 8 86 Replacing the Platen Roller 0900041 continued sese 8 87 Replacing the Card Cleaning or Feed Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 4i petite peterem ire tre ro et etr ERE PM RU pta 8 88 Refer t Drawing D9001 10 reine terere Pe T LER EIER E UR XX an anes AERE 8 88 Replacing the Card Cleaning or Feed Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 continued secet te cde Ss ero upon quinte 8 89 Replacing the Card Cleaning or Feed Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 continued uto reset rete trecenti mee es id n ce o nete EE 8 90 Replacing the Input Pusher 0900104 8 91 Replacing the Input Pusher 0900104 continued senem 8 92 Replacing the Card Feed or Exit Roller 0900042 and the Card Drive Gear 810266 8 93 Refer to Drawing D9001 10 eure t e hte Ecrire 8 93 Replacing the Card Feed or Exit Roller D900042 and the Card Drive Gear 810266 continued 8 94 Replacing the Card Feed or Exit Roller D900042 and the Car
151. aged if exposed to static electricity discharges Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent equipment or media damage refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent equipment or media damage observe all established Electrostatic Discharge ESD procedures while handling cables in or near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies To prevent equipment or media damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device e g a high quality wrist strap grounded to avoid potential damage To prevent equipment or media damage always remove the Ribbon and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs unless otherwise specified To prevent equipment or media damage take jewelry off of fingers and hands as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris before working on the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table Part No Description Category Drawing No 810266 Gear Belts D900110 DTC400 DTC30 Gears 0 DTC300MCar d Transport D840888 Pulley Belts D900089 DTC400 DTC30 Gears 0 DTC300M Platen Idler Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3
152. ailing Edge of Card of Card dem Direction card travels through printer Front of Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 107 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print End of Form Option Use this option to reduce or increase the overall printable area in order to optimize edge to edge printing toward the trailing edge of a card Note When adjusting this value keep in mind that cards always remain in the same position while moving through the Printer The diagram below represents how the end of form will move in relation to the fixed card position as a positive or negative Print End of Form value is entered Step Procedure 1 Enter a negative value to reduce the Print End of Form and move the end of the printable area more toward the leading edge of the card OR Enter a positive value to increase the print length and move the end of the printable area more toward the trailing edge of the card e Maximum Adjustment Range The maximum adjustment range is 127 As a rule 20 equals about 030 8mm which is about the same as the thickness of a standard CR 80 size card Rear of Printer Card Output Side of Printer Leading Edge of Card Card Input Side of Printer Trailing Edge of Card um Direction card travels through printer Front of Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 108 RESTR
153. ain board If still having blank card issues continue to Step 6 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 36 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Blank Output issues continued Step Procedure 6 Ensure that the proper voltage is being applied to the Printhead a b C d Remove the back cover Using a Digital Voltmeter connect the negative lead to ground Probe Pins 1 to 5 of the Printhead power connection on J16 Ensure that a voltage between 22 to 23 VDC is read on each pin e If less than 22 volts is read on any of the pins replace the Printhead e f still having issue with blank cards replace the Main Board See the current DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Service Manual for instructions on replacing the Main Board in the Parts Replacement Section DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 37 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Flipper Table Module Assembly Problems Resolving the No Flipper Table Module problem All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer See the Flipper Table Module Installation section as needed Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom The Flipper Table Module Assembly is not functioning e Printer Error State The Printer is unable to communicate with the Flipper Module e LCD Error Display No Flip In
154. al Rev 1 3 8 83 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Headlift Sensor Assembly D900113 continued Steps Procedure 7 Use a Needle Nose Pliers to firmly grasp the Headlift Sensor and pull to remove it Note The Headlift Sensor is a pressure fit Sensor and does not rely on any screws to fasten it to the Printer 8 Replace the Sensor 9 Reverse to reassemble e stepper Motor Assy D300087 Spring F000231 EN Rear Sideplate D900013 3mm Flat Washer 140040 0900089 Idler Post 0900037 Screw FOO01 Screw FOO01 1 Input Feed Motor Assembly D900084 _ Cam Headlift Motor Assembly 0900085 y Screw F000192 Screw FO001 1 Headlift Sensor Assembly 0900113 PCD RFID Antenna Assy A000365 DTC400 Headlift Screw 000177 Ext Spring F000334 me ya Ribbon Take up Motor Assy 0900086 Two 2 Screws F000172 Four 4 Screws F000177 Printhead Cam Lever D900043 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 84 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Roller Cable and Fan Replacement Replacing the Platen Roller D900041 Refer to Drawing D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Retaining Ring Pliers Parts Needed Platen Roller D900041 Retaining Ring X1 140048 Roller Shaft Locking Bushing D90046 Retaining Clip 140062 X1 Estimated Repair Time
155. allic resin Ribbons are available for printing resin images with a unique metallic sheen DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Components Dye Sublimation Print Ribbons Note that the Printer requires both specialized and authorized Print Ribbons in order to print and function properly Step Procedure 1 Do not run the cards with a contaminated dull or uneven surface through the Printer A Caution Printing onto such cards will ultimately lead to poor print quality and will greatly reduce the life of the Printhead Always store the card stock in its original packaging or in a clean dust free container Do not print onto cards that have been dropped or soiled Note Printhead damage caused by contaminated or poor quality cards will automatically void the Printhead s factory warranty If printing onto cards with a pre punched slot do not print over the area of the card with the punched slot Note To avoid this area when printing use the options in the Overlay Print Area tab to omit printing in this area or punch the slot after the card has printed DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 12 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Components Dye Sublimation Resin Print Ribbons Type Description Dye The Dye Sublimation resin Print Ribbon combines the y
156. anel Resin backside option DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences m ajx Magnetic E riip Card K PanelResin Printer Supplies Image Calor Calibrate Ribbon Type Auto Ribbon Select Color Matching System Color Management Resin Dither Optimized for Graphics Print Both Sides Disable Printing Split 1 Set of Ribbon Panels Print Back Side First Print Back Side Only Rotate Front 180 Degrees Rotate Back 180 Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 65 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Enabling the Frontside option Overlay Print Area Step Procedure 1 Select the Front radio button which enables the Overlay Print Area and Security Options functions s DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences dx Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Meoratic Ereeding Dvenay Prat Alea KPanelResn Plinter Supplies 20 Cad Size Fiant C Back Es Paine Area t Direction Card Travels trough Printer D ab Dveray Pnnt Ama p Security Option D etined Alege Visual Secuiily Solubans For Pret and Overlay Nov Viel Orly Ere On a Uno Lat C Lower Lar HD Lower Fig DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Servi
157. anual Rev 1 3 8 66 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Input Feed Motor Assembly D900084 Refer to Drawings D900077 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Input Motor Assembly D900084 Estimated Repair Time 15 minutes Steps Procedures Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the three 3 screws F000177 that secure the Card Feed Input Motor Assembly to the Printer See the frontend display with this set of procedures Disconnect the Input Motor power cable Push the Card Hopper to locked down position DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 67 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Input Feed Motor Assembly 0900084 continued Steps Procedures 8 Pull the Motor Roller Assembly out of the Printer e Note 1 The access hole for the Card Input Roller is virtually the same size as the Roller so some force will be needed to put the Roller through the hole
158. ard and its Magnetic Stripe will always remain in the same relative position as the card travels through the Printer The diagram below represents how the magnetic data will move in relation to the fixed position of a card s Magnetic Stripe as a positive or negative Magnetic Offset value is entered Note For this diagram imagine that the card is transparent and the card s Magnetic stripe can be seen through the top or front side of the card Step Procedure 1 Enter a negative value to move the start of the magnetic data more toward the leading edge of the card or the card output to the side of the Printer OR Enter a positive value to move the start of the magnetic data toward the trailing edge of the card or the card input to the side of the Printer e Magnetic Data Direction The arrows on these buttons indicate the direction the magnetic data will move on the card s Magnetic Stripe e Maximum Adjustment Range The maximum adjustment range is 127 As a rule 20 equals about 030 8mm Note Keep this in mind when adjusting this option to avoid over adjusting A Caution Ifthe negative value is set too high the Printer may start encoding before the card s Magnetic Stripe reaches the encoding head DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 113 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Mag Top of Form Option continued Rear of Printer Card Output Cond
159. ary of Terms continued Term Definition Printing Direct to Card DTC The Direct to Card printing process prints digital images directly onto any plastic card with a smooth clean glossy PVC surface Dither A system of distributing dots to control the hue brightness and or saturation In monochrome printing this controls the brightness In color printing dithering can supply a larger color gamut than non dithering In the Driver dither modes can be selected to provide better image quality depending on the type of image to be printed Dongle A peripheral that attaches to a port to act as a key for an installed application The PC is able to run that application only when the dongle is installed Typically it works as a pass through device and is connected in serial to the parallel cable Dot The smallest unit of an image that the Printer is able to produce The smaller the dot see dot pitch the sharper the image Dot pitch A measurement of image sharpness denoting the width of the dots that make up a pixel The smaller the pitch the sharper the image Download The transfer of a data file from one device to the other over a network or cable typically from the Internet to a PC DPI Dot Per Inch A measurement of the Printer resolution indicating how many dots a Printer can produce in a linear inch DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory A microchip based volatile memory st
160. as frontside and backside options as shown below 1 Magnetic En F Panel Rein Prine 5 pelas Image Coler Calibrate BTR PEE Eibbaon msn Black vara 4f DTC400 Card Printer Printing Preferences F ull Later gr Auto Ribbon 5 alact Matching Color Management Pesin Dither For Cirapios Frint Both Sides psable Prniing W Solt 1 Sat af Ribbon Parel Print Baek Side First Frint Back Side Only v Front 180 Decrees w Fictate Back 1 Degrees ok tes s DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 17 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC300 The DTC300 window with the Device Options tab is displayed below Note The DTC300 Printer now has frontside and backside options as shown below 4f DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences 2 x Printer Supplies Calibrate K Panel Image Color Magnetic E nd Device Aue Ribben 5 elec Matching System Coler Managemert v Print Balh Sided Disable Printing Spliti Seto Abban Panels Pint Back Side First Print Back Side Only Rare Fror 180 Degens Rolgte Back 180 Deges DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 18 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Elec
161. ata in the format necessary for the Printer but also for the Windows interface to execute the print commands Gray Scale A graduation through the various brightness levels from white to black Halftoning A process in monochrome printing that simulates continuous tone by using changes to the distribution of single dots Increasing the number of dots in a given area increases the darkness even though the individual dots stay the same size DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 8 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Hard Drive A high capacity storage device in a PC consisting of non removable magnetically encodable platters Hardware Physical components of a system such as the Printer the PC the power supply HDP High Definition The High Definition Printing process prints full color images onto Printing clear HDP transfer film InTM The HDP film is then fused to the card through heat and pressure via a heated Roller The Printhead is capable of 256 shades with a sharper print and better color match Head Abbreviation for Printhead Heat sink A device used to dissipate heat into the ambient Heat Seal A resinous film transferred by the Printhead onto the back of an HDP intermediate transfer film to facilitate adhesion HiCo High The coercivity value of magnetic med
162. ate D900102 continued See the previous page Pinch Roller 0900098 S aid 000338 Card Cleaning Roller Platen Roller 02 90004 1 ean Roller Plate 09007102 Cleaning Roller Lever a N Card Feed Roller ETE Qutput Mag Roller ANO Printhead Assembly 0900023 Screw FOOO16S DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 52 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor D840980 Refer to Drawings D900121 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Phillips Head Screwdriver Needle Nose Pliers Parts Needed Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Ion Estimated Repair Time 15 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Disconnect the Ribbon Supply Motor Power Cable from the Ribbon Take up Motor 6 Disconnect the Ribbon Supply Encoder Sensor Cable from the Ribbon Take up Encoder Sensor C
163. ate Back 180 Degrees option to rotate the image on the back of the card by 180 degrees when printed v Fint Bolh Sides Disable Printing Pint Back Side First IY Rotate Front 180 Deca eat I Port Both Sidas Disable Porting Back Side Fire Back Side Only 7 Rolgle Back 180 Degrees IBN DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 39 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Disable Printing option Use this option to disable the printing capabilities of the Printer yet still allows the Printer to encode cards Step Description 1 Select this option to encode or re encode cards without wasting additional time effort or printing supplies Note When this option is selected no print data will not be sent to the Printer All encoding instructions will be sent according to how they are configured within the software Print Both Sides Print Back Side First Print Back Side Only Rotate Front 188 Degrees Rotate Back 180 Degrees Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 40 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Image Color tab DTC400 DTC300 Step Procedure 1 Select the Algebraic color matching option and then use this option to control the Contrast and Gamma of the printed image as well as the individual color balance of Yellow Magent
164. ate made of many layers that holds the electronic circuit elements and wire traces Boot up A series of operations that the Printer runs through when power is first applied including a series of initializing status testing and a diagnostics program to ensure a ready state Buffer A block of memory in the Printer or PC that holds print files until the processor is ready to print them Cable A set of conductors wrapped together and often concealed within insulation used for signal transfer from one device to another with connectors on either end that allows the cable to be removed DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Cache A type of memory buffer to store data temporarily used to hold information that is most often exchanged between contRoller and peripheral to expedite data transfer Calibrating A procedure to adjust an electro mechanical device so that it operates within established parameters Cleaning Roller High tack Rollers positioned just after the input Hopper to lift debris off the card as it rolls over it A clean card surface improves print quality CD Compact Disc A 4 75 inch 12 cm optical disk that stores data written too and read from using a laser DMA Direct Memory Access Channels designated within the Windows oper
165. ating environment that are used for dedicated high speed communication between the PC and the Printer port Centronics A parallel communications interface that has become the standard for connections to Printers designed by the Centronics Corp Coercivity The property of a Magnetic Stripe that indicates the amount of force needed before magnetic saturation measured in Oersted Oe Color matching The process of adjusting color hue saturation and brightness to duplicate a desired color An algorithm within the Driver which adjusts the color balance and provides output with the desired color automates this process Compressed air Air stored in a tank or produced by an aerosol can delivered by through nozzle at a high speed Used in the Printer to blow out debris Contrast The degree of difference in luminance of two areas Control panel The panel on the Printer from which the user can control Printer functions The Printer is usually composed of the control buttons and an LED or LCD display DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition CR 79 A card dimension standard of 2 0625 L X 3 3125 W 0 002 W 0 005 L or 52 400 X 84 150 mm CR 80 A card dimension standard of 2 125 X 3 370 0 002 W 0 00
166. back is printed with the K Panel and the O Panel is printed on the front e f using the YMCKOK Ribbon type the front of the card is printed with the YMCK Panels and the back is printed with the second K Panel Note 1 This option is automatically enabled when the YMCKOK Ribbon type is selected v Print Bath Sides Disable Printing I Zplit 1 Set of Ribbon Panels tE Print Back Side First Print Back Side Only Rotate Front 180 Degrees Rotate Back 180 Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 24 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print Back Side First option Step Procedure 1 Select this option e f you need to print the first page of a two page document on the backside of the card OR e f you need to print the resin black on the chip side of the Smartcard The second page of the document will be printed on the front side of the card Iv Print Both Sides Disable Printing Split Set of Ribbon Panels rint Back Side First Print Back Side Only Folate Front 180 D egress Rolate Back 180 Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 25 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print Back Side Only option Use this option to print only onto the backside of cards Step Procedure 1 Select this option to print only onto the backside of card
167. bbonTraq A Fargo Electronics method of placing bar code like marks on the transition area between color panels These marks are arranged for detection by a reflective Sensor array for the identification of Ribbon type and the Ribbon position RMA number Return Merchandise Authorization A number acquired from Fargo Support that authorizes the return of merchandise for repair or credit number Roller Elements of the Printer used for the transport of media consisting of a rotating steel shaft for Ribbon or a rotating steel shaft with a rubber cylinder installed at the shaft midpoint for moving cards RS 232 An interface standard established in 1969 by the Electronic Industries Association regarding the connecting of computer peripherals Saturation A measure of the degree of color from gray with the same brightness DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 16 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued communications Term Definition Self test A pre determined print file used to confirm Printer operation typically sent from the Driver or stored in the Printer s memory Sensor An electro mechanical electro optical device used to indicate a change in state in the Printer such as when a card reaches a certain location Serial The transfer of data one bit at a time and in sequential order us
168. cables in or near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies To prevent equipment or media damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device e g a high quality wrist strap grounded to avoid potential damage To prevent equipment or media damage always remove the Ribbon and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs unless otherwise specified To prevent equipment or media damage take jewelry off of fingers and hands as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris before working on the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Communications Errors Resolving the Communication Errors Symptom s Incorrect output communications error on PC or Printer stalling no response from Printer no job printed paper out error Step Procedure 1 Confirm that the system meets the minimum requirements as shown here e BM PC or compatible e Windows 98SE Me 2000 XP Pentium class 233 MHz computer with 64 MB of RAM or higher e 200 MB free hard disk space or higher e USB Port 2 Confirm the correct installation of the Printer Driver a Close the software program and check the Printer Driver b Reboot the computer c Ensure the Printer Driver is installed correctly Note Especially if an obsolete Driver was recently removed d Ensure the correct setup options within the Printer Driver are selected e C
169. ccess the Fargo Diagnostics Utility Help document as shown below JF Farga Daa gnostic s Utility Enter i Data here to be Magnetically E toa Note that the Start and Sto are not required E mmm rm tO Hids Contents indar Search Fargo Diagiaslic Welcome Mechanics Tab Sal Tost Tab Card Samples Tab E Card Tab Lamination E Eraser Ta Tab Haw te Lise the Diagrosties DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 27 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the About button in the Diagnostics Utility Step Procedure 1 Select the About button to access version information for the Diagnostics tool Note A list of the Printers that the Diagnostic Utility supports is also available FARGO Select a printer to continue DU TESDU Caid Printer m Prints Up cate Mechanics Bel Tests Caid amples Magnetic Encoding Enter Data here to be Magnetically encoded to a card Mote that the Start and Stop sentinels are not required ig About Pargo Electronbce Card Printer Dianos Toul Es Fargo Glectonice Card Prot Tac 3019 Faga Frinbe Tool FIH S1US3zB Cepyiight 2004 Farge This Ecl support the ollam Probes 410 Printer Carlet CT Pilates Card ATP
170. ce subject to direct sunlight excessive dust mechanical vibration or shock About Moisture Condensation If the unit is brought directly from a cold to a warm location or is placed in a very damp room moisture may condense inside the unit Should this occur print quality may not be optimum Leave the unit turned OFF in a warm dry room for several hours before using This will allow the moisture to evaporate DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Unpacking and Inspection While unpacking your Printer inspect the carton to ensure that no damage has occurred during shipping Make sure that all supplied accessories are included with your unit Check that the following items are included e Power Supply e US Power Cable e Europe Power Cable e Software Installation CD User Guide e User Guide e Warranty Statement Registration Card and Compliancy Document Reviewing the Printer front view LED 4 input Hopper Flipper Lid itd a i Output Hopper DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the Printer front view Cartridge being installed Reviewing the LCD top front part of Printer LCD Display a Power Button and LED Media Button and LED DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electr
171. ce Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 8 17 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No D900086 Ribbon Take Up Motor D900077 Motor Assembly A000368 Power Board D900115 Communication Board D900085 Headlift Motor D900077 Motor Cam Assembly A000374 Ribbon Sensor Sensor D900078 Sensor D900138 Bracket Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 18 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No D900113 Headlift Sensor Sensor D900077 D900035 Printhead Cable Cable NA D9010089 Idler Pulley Shaft Mis D900077 Hardware DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 8 19 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Parts Replacement Table continued Part No Description Category Drawing No 044301 DTC400 DTC300 DTC Printhead D900110 Kit 300M Printhead Kit D900040 Roller Roller D900110 DTC400 DTC300 DTC 300M Card Cleaning Roller Driven D900041 Roller Roller D900110 DTC400 DTC300 DTC 300MPlaten D900088 Roller Roller D900110
172. ce Manual Rev 1 3 6 66 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Enabling the Backside option Overlay Print Area Step Procedure 1 Select the Back radio button which enables only the Overlay Print Area function af DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences Ux Card Device Options Image Color Calkrate Magnetic Encoding Overlay PrintAres K Resin Printer Supplies 0 Card Size Frort Back 2m po X ap 007 rx ur pones Comm 0 0 Delined Area X S ecuriby Solutions For Pint and Overly No Visus Securls F Fer verla Orly C verla Fer Eint Only Me C DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 67 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Overlay Print Area dropdown menu Step Procedure 1 Select the Full Card option for the Printer to overlay and or print the entire card OR Select the Defined Area s option for the Printer to overlay and or print only in the selected and defined area or areas OR Select the Undefined Area s option for the Printer to overlay and or print only in the space outside the selected and defined area OR Select the Omit Smart Chip Area option for the Printer to overlay and or print only in the space outside the standard location of a smart chip OR Select the Omit Magnetic Stripe Area option
173. ch the Media InTM dye is transferred from the Ribbon by the Printhead The film is then transferred to the card surface by the hot lamination Roller ISO For the Greek iso meaning same Used to represent data from the International Organization for Standardization JIS Il Japanese Industrial Standard The standard for encoding to a Magnetic Stripe provided by the Japan Standards Association The single track is as wide as ISO tracks 1 and 2 combined and in the same approximate location as those tracks but on the front of the card The coercivity level is 600 Oe K Panel An area of a multicolored Ribbon e g YMCK that contains black resin for transfer to the card surface Also used in reference to the application of preference to items printed on the card those using the black panel in lieu of a process YMC black Lamination The application of a film or resinous substance fused by heat and pressure to the surface of a card LAN Local Area Network An array of several computers connected through a series of data transfer cables for the sharing of data and peripherals DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 10 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Landscape A document layout that is viewed with the document s long axis in a horizontal orientation LCD
174. charges Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the below e To prevent equipment or media damage refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent equipment or media damage observe all established Electrostatic Discharge ESD procedures while handling cables in or near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies e To prevent equipment or media damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device e g a high quality wrist strap grounded to avoid potential damage e To prevent equipment or media damage always remove the Ribbon and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs unless otherwise specified To prevent equipment or media damage take jewelry off of fingers and hands as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris before working on the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware Step Procedure 1 Open the Fargo Diagnostic Utility located in the Programs folder as shown below e Click on the Start icon on the desktop e Select the Programs folder e Select the Fargo folder e Click on the Diagnostic Utility as shown below DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electro
175. cifications VeriMarkTM foils will cover a dimensional area of 1 9 cm length x 1 3 cm height The exclusive areas are as follows VeriMarkTM Card customers will be able to choose 1 of 8 pre defined placements corners via Printer Driver 4 positions Landscape and 4 Positions Portrait mode VeriMarkTM foil placement will not interfere with card punch slots Foil color base is silver debossed impression is gold foil VeriMarkTM foil placement will be located 0 4 cm from the edges of the card except for the top two locations on portrait orientation cards positions E amp F The foil will be located 0 9 cm from the top of the card and 0 4 cm from the sides of the card HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM Application Specifications HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM foils will cover a dimensional area of 1 5 cm x 1 5 cm The exclusive areas are as follows HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM card end users will be able to choose 1 of 8 pre defined placements corners via Printer Driver 4 positions Landscape and 4 positions Portrait mode HoloMarkTM foil placement will not interfere with card punch slots Foil Color options will be silver or gold Outside edge placement of Foil impression options on card will be 0 4 cm from edge of card HoloMarkTM foil placement options will be at all four corners of card located 0 4 cm from edge of card DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 7 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo
176. cs Inc Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 3 a Click on the Browse button to browse through an open file dialog box as shown below b Select the Print File PRN that is to be sent to the Printer Lack iri Local Dik E Fe zem Daruiente Seeking lu Fiers Inetpuh Documents Program Piles ie IM DD CHI wUTenp Backhoes HOPAONTst pr Decimale E File ame Fieral lp Piet Files I pin Cancel Fetes go SSE Fils tabe sork ta pinio L AHOPEDOT et em DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 4 Select the number of copies to be printed as shown below S Pargo Diagnostics Utility re Setta Caid Samples Magnete Encodng Select Fie File Name Mone Selected Send File Copies fl 4 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 5 Click on the Send File button in order to send the selected Print Files PRN to the Printer f Fargo Diagnostics Utility xi Select a printer to C
177. d Iv Dalhad Assa amp uncer Pike Hein tes DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 90 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Full Card option Front and Back options Step Procedure 1 Select the Full Card option for the Printer Driver to print the resin black K panel for all black found within all areas of the image CR 80 Card Size inches 0 0 Defined Area dh Direction Card Travels Through Printer ENS Print All Black With E Panel v Ful Card Defined Areals Undefined Areals Print YMC Under E C Print K Only DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 91 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Defined Area s option Front and Back options Step Procedure 1 Select the Defined Area s option for the Printer Driver to print the resin black K panel for all black found only in a desired and defined area or areas CA 80 Card Size CJ tt ttt tt tt Direction Card Travels Through Printer Delete Print All Black with Panel Full Card v Defined Areals Undefined Areals alee oe els inches E ae HHHH N ILLLLLLLP Veine Aza Print MC Under Print K Only DTC400 DT
178. d 4 9 to 5 5 VDC c Replace the Sensor if the voltages do not read correctly Note See the current DTCA00 DTC300 DTC300M Service Manual for related instructions in the Parts Replacement Section d If the Motor does turn continue to Step 7 Replace the Headlift Motor Note See the current DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Service Manual for related instructions in the Parts Replacement Section a Ifthe Motor does turn continue to Step 8 Replace the Main Board Resolving the Cover Open Error Message All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 33 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Step Procedure 1 Review the following information Symptom The Printer errors immediately after sending a print job or the Rollers do not operate by pressing the cottons on the front panel when the cover is open e Printer Error State The front cover Sensor detects that the cover is open e LCD Error Display Cover Open e Driver Monitor Error Display None 2 Check for debris as follows a Open the front cover and check that no debris has accumulated in the Sensor opening Use compressed air to clean the opening as needed b Ifthe Sensor still does not work continue to Step 3 3 Check that the Sensor tab on the front cover is not damaged a Open the front cover and examine
179. d Drive Gear 810266 continued 8 95 Replacing the Pinch Roller 0900098 enne nnnm 8 96 Refer to Drawing 900110 oec herir eo eorr eren re ert rte 8 96 Replacing the Pinch Roller D900098 continued sese 8 97 Replacing the Pinch Roller D900098 continued 8 98 Replacing the Cleaning Roller Lever D900051 sese 8 99 Replacing the Cleaning Roller Lever 0900051 8 100 Replacing the Cleaning Roller Lever 0900051 8 101 Replacing the Printhead Cable Assembly D900035 sse eene 8 102 Replacing the Printhead Cable Assembly 0900035 continued sss 8 103 Replacing the Fan Assembly 090001313 ener enne nnne nnns 8 104 Replacing the Fan Assembly 0900033 continued essere 8 105 Pulley urb 8 106 Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 8 106 Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 contrimuedy ue edi eerte a ie eser at ce ce ater ea ev eet iE vedere te ea 8 107 Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley Shaft Assembly D900089 and the Stepper Motor Drive Belt E0000
180. d Technicians with quick efficient lookup of related procedures components and terms The manual can be used effectively either in soft or hard copy depending on the preference of the Installer or Technician Manual Description Sequence of Operations Glossary of Terms and Technical Functional Specifications hyper linked You can go directly to the Sequence of Operations Glossary of Terms Technical Specifications and Functional Specifications to learn how to use the processes procedures functions and windows for the card Printer within concise correlative tables Table of Contents hyper linked You can use the automated Table of Contents to quickly locate for example an error message a procedure the index or an appendix Troubleshooting Replacement Removal Diagnostic and Navigation Procedures in hyper linked Sections You can go directly to Specifications General Troubleshooting Printer Adjustments Parts Replacement Printer Packing Board Level Diagnostics LCD On Line Menu Navigation and Firmware Updates to find troubleshooting removal and replacement procedures The section titles are always labeled according to their function for consistent usage Cross Referencing hyper linked You can use the cross referencing links to quickly locate for example an error message or a procedure Comprehensive Index hyper linked You can use the COMPREHENSIVE INDEX to quickly
181. d you like ta open the file or save it to your computer Open Cancel Info Swaps ask before opening thie type of file 12 8 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 7 Click on the Save button to save the file to the computer s Desktop as shown below H Documents T Comeuter d My Nebwork Pacer Mit Onoeuments Dikon 5 My Documents wr Canpulal Pisces File name D TC4203 09111 i Application 7 5 ave as tppe DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 9 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 8 Click on the Close button to close this dialog when the download is completed as shown below Download complete E rij x Download Complete Saved DTCA4DO0300v111 exe From we fargo com Downloaded 124 KB in 1 sec Download to CH Documents OTC4 0O0300 111 exe Transfer rate 124 5 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 10 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 9 From the computer s desktop double click on the Firmware exe fi
182. de option via the Back radio button Step Procedure 1 Select For Print and Overlay for the defined area to apply to both the printing and overlay process OR Select For Overlay Only for the defined area to apply only to the overlay process Note In this mode printing will still be allowed over the entire card and only the overlay will be affected OR Select For Print Only No Overlay for the defined area to apply only to the print process Important In this mode the overlay is completely disabled so it will not be applied Caution An overlay or an overlaminate must protect dye sublimation printing or it will quickly begin to wear or fade DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 70 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Overlay Print Area continued 2 Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Magnetio Eneoding Overlay Print amp rea K Panel Aesir Prnter Suppies rd DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences CH B CardSize Front C Back 7 wol C 0 0 Defined Area X Direction Card Travels through Printer Overlay Pint Area r Security Options ric Visual Securily Solutions ForPrintand Overlay No Visual Security C For Only C ForPrint Only Overlay I DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3
183. e These options apply to the DTC400 DTC300 and DTC300M Printers e Click on the Barcode Test Card button to test the resin printing capabilities of the Printer Note A full color Ribbon YMC with a resin panel or a resin Ribbon is required for this test e Click on the Standard Self Test button to determine Image Placement and confirm that the Printer is working properly Note The image consists of fifteen 15 gray scale boxes The gray boxes are composed from a composite of YMC color panels H ed zii EN EN um Click the Magnetic Self Test button to test the Magnetic Encoding capabilities of the Printer Note Be sure to have HiCo magnetic stripe cards installed in your Printer when running this test Fun Barcode Test Card Hun Standard Selt Test Run Magnete Self Test DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 24 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Card Samples tab in the Diagnostics Utility Step Procedure 1 a Select the Card Samples tab to print sample images from the Printer Select the desired Image as shown below Note You will see the enlarged Image after you select it from several options Check the settings defined in your Driver before printing your selection Click on the Print button when you are ready as shown below Note The default Card Size is CR 80 as shown below
184. e Belt F000094 Refer to Drawings D900077 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Steper Motor Idler Puley shaft assembly D900089 1 Stepper Motor Drive Belt F00094 Estimated Repair Time 35 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Remove the Ribbon Take up Motor Assembly See Replacing the Ribbon Take up Motor D900086 6 Remove the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley See Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 108 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley Shaft Assembly D900089 and the Stepper Motor Drive Belt F000094 continued Steps Procedure 7 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the Stepper Motor Idler set screw 8 Remove the Stepper Motor Drive Belt F00094 9 Remove the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley Spring F000231
185. e Diagnostics Utility 11 13 Selecting the Self Tests tab in the Diagnostics Utility 11 24 Selecting the Card Samples tab in the Diagnostics Utility 11 25 Selecting the Magnetic Encoding tab in the Diagnostics Utility 11 26 Selecting the Help button in the Diagnostics Utility 11 27 Selecting the About button in the Diagnostics Utility 11 28 Selecting the Exit button in the Diagnostics Utility 11 29 Section 12 Firmware Upgrades 12 1 Introduction 12 1 Requirements 12 1 Table of Contents 12 1 Safety Messages review carefully 12 2 Downloading Firmware 12 3 Downloading Firmware continued 12 14 Placing the Printer in the Firmware Upgrade Mode 12 17 Sending the Firmware File 12 19 Section 13 Fargo Technical Support 13 1 Contacting Fargo Technical Support 13 1 Reading the Serial Numbers on a Fargo Printer 13 2 Finding out when a Fargo Card Printer was manufactured 13 2 Reviewing Example No 1 Serial Number 80453289 13 2 Reviewing Example No 2 Serial Number A1280224 13 2 Section 14 Reviewing the Spare Parts List 14 1 Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Spare Parts List 14 1 Section 15 Glossary of Terms 15 1 Section 16 Index 16 1 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 viii Section 1 Introduction How to use the manual The DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 is in fact the troubleshooting and service manual for the entire card Printer The manual is designed to provide Installers an
186. e Front 180 Deges Rolga Back 1 EO Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 34 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Overlay Heat O option DTC300M Use this option to control the amount of heat the Printer uses when printing with the overlay panel of a Ribbon Note This control can be helpful for fine tuning the transfer of overlay onto the card Step Procedure 1 Select KO Premium Resin Overlay under the Ribbon Type dropdown menu to activate the Overlay Heat 0 slide Check on the Print Both Sides checkbox to activate all three slides while also selecting KO Premium Resin Overlay under the Ribbon Type dropdown menu See below Move the slide to the left to cause less heat to be used in the printing process Note Certain card types may need additional heat for better transfer of the overlay material OR e Move the slide to the right to cause more heat to be used Encadrg Overlay Print anes Finter Supplies iud D pera albae Rean Heal Front TEER Ik LoT bot Resin Heat Back i i i i i Dealey E fe Pont Bath Sides piae Parting Pikt Bask Side First Print Back Side D nly lec aid Rage Back 180 Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 35 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print Both S
187. e Manual Rev 1 3 6 57 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the LRC Generation radio buttons Use this option to customize the LRC Generation Mode used to encode the magnetic data on the currently selected track Step Procedure 1 Select NO LRC to change the LRC Generation to none OR Select Even Parity to change the LRC Generation to Even Parity OR Select Odd Parity to change the LRC Generation to Odd Parity Using the Character Parity radio buttons Use this option to customize the Character Data Parity used to encode the magnetic data on the currently selected track Step Procedure 1 Select No Parity to change the Character Parity to none OR Select Even Parity to change the Character Parity to Even Parity OR Select Odd Parity to change the Character Parity to Odd Parity LAC Generation C MaLRC Even Parity C Odd Parity Character Parity C No Parity Even Parity f Odd Parity DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 58 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Shift Data Left checkbox Use this option to shift the recorded magnetic data to the left hand side of the card s Magnetic Stripe OR Use this option for situations that require cards to be readable with insert type readers that may be unable to read the right hand side of the card Step Procedure 1 Select the Shift Data Left checkbox
188. e Print Security Suite detects the SecureMark Media installed in the Printer and prompts the User to convert the Printer to be SecureMark enabled d The SecureMark conversion is completed and only Integrator specific SecureMark media will work in this Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 3 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 4 Setup and Installation Procedures The following guide will walk you through the installation of the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Driver Time Requirement software This software installation process will require approximately 2 to 5 minutes depending on the speed of your PC e Time Requirement Printer The time required to set up a standard DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Printer would be approximately 5 to 10 minutes The System Requirements are as follows IBM PC or compatible Windows 98SE Me 2000 XP Pentium class 233MHz computer with 64MB of RAM or higher 200MB free hard disk space or higher USB 1 1 Table of Contents Section 4 Setup and Installation Procedures 4 1 Table of Contents 4 1 Printer Setup and Installation 4 3 Choosing A Good Location 4 3 About Moisture Condensation 4 3 Printer Setup and Installation Error Bookmark not defined Choosing A Good Location Error Bookmark not defined About Moisture Condensation Error Bookma
189. e inside of the Printer See Cleaning the Printer s Interior 4 Clean the Cleaning Roller See Cleaning the Card Feed and Cleaning Rollers Mike Berman Student 3957105 library Code 2439 554 5 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 42 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Incorrect Image Darkness problems All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information Symptom Printed cards are too dark or too light e Printer Error State None e LCD Error Display None e Driver Monitor Error Display None 2 Run a self test to ensure that the issue is not with the Driver settings 3 Adjust the Dye Sub Intensity setting within the Image Color tab of the Printer Driver See Using the Image Color tab DTC400 DTC300 procedure Dye Sub Intensity y imer NEU RUE Resin Heat Front 0 IK 1 Resin Heat Back m 0 Ks e ex Overlay Heat LI a re ee ae Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 43 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Incorrect Image Darkness problems continued Step Procedure 4 Correct the Image Darkness See the Using the Image Darkness Option procedure Mike Berman stuar
190. e is stretched or blown up a pixilated or grainy effect will occur when printing as shown below rightside DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 53 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Running the Self Test Perform a self test after a an initial setup of the Printer b a calibration procedure has been conducted or c a part has been replaced to check for proper Printer operation Fargo Electronics Inc Step Procedure 1 Verify that a full color or Premium Resin Ribbon Cartridge is installed and that cards are properly loaded A Caution Ifthe power is ON disconnect the Power Cable from the Printer s rear panel 2 Press and hold the Pause Resume button 3 While holding down the Pause Resume button plug the power cable back into the Printer 4 e Full Color Ribbon Cartridge installed The Printer will print a 3 color process gray scale on the front of the card The overlay pass is not printed during the Self test See Display A below e Premium Resin Ribbon Cartridge installed The Printer will print a single color gray scale on the front of the card See Display B below DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 54 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Running the Standard Self Test Print Display A Full Color Test Print DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 55 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electron
191. e printed card Note If selecting the Rotate Front 180 Degrees option the image will appear upside down as it exits the Printer c Position the defined area opposite to the measurement of the onscreen card design which will appear right side up DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 75 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Defined Area Option continued Step Procedure 6 a Determine whether to use the Frontside option via the Front radio button or the Backside option via the Back radio button b Use the Defined Area arrows to navigate back and forth from area to area in the Frontside or Backside area Note The active area will always be highlighted with a dotted outline c Define another area by clicking on the Defined Area UP arrow e Another 2 x 2 5mm x 5mm area will appear in the lower left hand corner Note This is the location in which all newly defined areas will first appear e Upto 5 areas can be defined however additional areas cannot be added until the most recently created area has been moved or sized Note For this reason size and position each area as it is created d Delete an area by using the Defined Area arrows to select the area and click on the Delete button Note If all areas are deleted the K Panel Resin options will automatically be deselected sf DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences Tx
192. e take up roll 4 color panels past the damaged area a Press on the Resume button b Ifthe issue persists continue to Step 5 Use the Fargo Diagnostic utility to cycle the Printhead to ensure proper printhead operation See the Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs procedure e If the Printhead does not cycle properly see Resolving the Headlift Motor Sensor Error e If the Printhead functions properly continue to Step 6 Replace the Ribbon Cartridge a Press on the Resume button b Ifthe issue persists continue to Step 7 Remove the rear cover in order to check that the Ribbon Encoder Sensor is securely connected to the J 4 Main Board connection and to the Encoder Sensor a Press on the Resume button b Ifthe issue persists replace the Encoder Sensor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 22 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Ribbon Out Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Printer will not print e Printer Error State The Ribbon Sensor has detected the End Of Ribbon mark e LCD Error Display Ribbon Out e Driver Monitor Error Display Ribbon Out 2 Replace the Ribbon Cartridge a Press on the Resume button DTC300 Card Printer A Ribbon Out Tha Ribban Cairidas iratalae in
193. ear the Printer and Computer so Fargo technicians can help to troubleshoot the Printer s Please have a self test and a sample card ready when calling Fargo Technical Support DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 13 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reading the Serial Numbers on a Fargo Printer The purpose of this section is to provide updated instructions for reading serial numbers on a Fargo Printer Finding out when a Fargo Card Printer was manufactured You can determine when your card Printer was manufactured by reading directly from the serial number affixed to your card Printer 1 Year Built The first two digits in the serial number indicate the year that the Printer was manufactured 2 Week Built The second two digits indicate the week Numeric Order The last four digits indicate the sequence number for the numeric order in which the Printers were built Reviewing Example No 1 Serial Number 80453289 1 80453289 The first two digits in the serial number indicate the year the Printer was built e g the digits 80 indicate the year 1998 80453289 The third and fourth digits in the serial number indicate the week the Printer was built e g the digits 45 indicate week 45 of that year 80453289 The last four digits indicate the sequence number for the numeric order in which the Printers were built Reviewing Example No 2 Serial Number A1280224
194. eat Back 0s ik i i po LJ i i i Dvere Heat CI 0 Print Both Sides Disable Printing Back Side Fire Print Back Side Only Front 180 Degrees Actete Back 180 Degiess DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 29 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Adjusting the Ribbon Type option DTC300M Use the Ribbon Type option to select Print Ribbons Step Description 1 Select the appropriate Print Ribbon Type option from the dropdown menu for the type of Print Ribbon in use e Standard Resin e K Premium Resin e Colored Resin e Metallic Resin e KO Premium Resin Overlay DTC300M Card Printer Printing Preferences 1 x Magnetic Encoding D verlag Print amp rea Printer Supplies Card Device Options Calibrate Ribbon Type Premium Resin ld Standard Resin FK Premium Resin Resin Dither Colored Resin Metallic Resin Premium Resin Overlay Resin Heat Tum 1 1 I 1 Resin Heat Back x 1 1 1 1 Heat E x Iv Print Both Sides Disable Printing Print Back Side First DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 30 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Auto Ribbon Select option DTC300M Step Description 1 Click on the Auto Ribbon Select button to ve
195. ed Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Mechanics tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Selecting the Self Tests tab in the Diagnostics Utility Selecting the Card Samples tab in the Diagnostics Utility Selecting the Magnetic Encoding tab in the Diagnostics Utility Selecting the Help button in the Diagnostics Utility Selecting the About button in the Diagnostics Utility Selecting the Exit button in the Diagnostics Utility DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 10 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 11 17 11 18 11 19 11 20 11 21 11 22 11 23 11 24 11 25 11 26 11 27 11 28 11 29 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Diagnostic Tool Utility Selecting from the Printer Selection menu Step Procedure 1 Click on the dropdown Printer selection menu to view a list of currently installed Fargo Printer
196. el on the Ribbon e LCD Error Display Ribbon Miscue e Driver Monitor Error Display Ribbon Sensor Card Printer A Ribbon Sensor Error The Pinter canre nd the ret panel en Ihe iban Cheok Het ihe Bien cartildas Is Inserate d propel and press rename To diok an Cancel Piet 23 ok DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 19 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Ribbon Sensor Error Ribbon Miscue continued Step Procedure 2 Open the front cover and remove the Ribbon Cartridge a Check that the Ribbon is in good condition and not wrinkled or broken b If Ribbon is broke or wrinkled repair the Ribbon and wind up the take up roll 4 color panels past the damaged area 3 Press on the Resume button If the issue persists continue to Step 4 4 Replace the Ribbon Cartridge a Press on the Resume button b Ifthe issue persists continue to Step 5 5 Press the Cancel Print button on the Driver Monitor Error Display Message 6 Reboot the Printer by cycling the power 7 Use the Driver Calibration tab to calibrate the Ribbon Sensor e If the issue persists continue to Step 8 8 Replace the Ribbon Sensor DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 20 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Ribbon Break Jam Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only facto
197. ellow Y Sublimation magenta M and cyan C dye sublimation panels with a resin black K resin Print panel xl By combining both types of Ribbon panels this Ribbon can be used to print full color photo quality images with the dye sublimation panels along with sharp black text and bar codes with the resin black panel A clear overlay panel O is also included on most Ribbons to protect the dye sublimation images Dye Sublimation images must have an overlay panel applied to them or they will quickly begin to wear or fade Full Color This Ribbon is used to print full color photo ID cards along with resin YMCKO black text and bar codes Both infrared and visible light bar code provides 250 scanners can read bar codes printed with resin black prints e An overlay panel is included to protect the full color dye sublimation printing v c NB YMCKOK The designation of colored Ribbon by the Panels of color in the order in which they are printed Yellow Y Magenta M Cyan C Black K Overlay O Black K used for backside black only printing YMCFKO The designation of colored Ribbon by the Panels of color in the order in which they are printed Yellow Y Magenta M Cyan C Flourescent F Black K Overlay O used for backside black only printing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 13 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Components
198. els of color in the order in which they are printed Yellow Y Magenta M Cyan C YMCK The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the order in which they are printed Yellow Y Magenta M Cyan C Black K YMCKH The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the order in which they are printed Yellow Y Magenta M Cyan Black Heat Seal YMCKK The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the order in which they are printed Yellow Y Magenta M Cyan C Black K Black K the second K is for backside black only printing YMCKO The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the order in which they are printed Yellow Y Magenta M Cyan C Black K Overlay O YMCKOK The designation of colored Ribbon by the panels of color in the order in which they are printed Yellow Y Magenta M Cyan C Black K Overlay O Black K used for backside black only printing DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 15 20 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Section 16 Index A About button 6 16 AC Alternating Current 15 1 Accepted Card Thickness 2 3 Accepted Card Types 2 3 Accepted Standard Card Sizes 2 3 Access Card 15 1 Adhesion 15 1 Adjusting the Image Darkness 5 44 5 46 Agency Listings 2 3 Algebraic 6 21 15 1 ANSI American National Standards
199. encoding After encoding the information is read off back and compared to the intended string DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 11 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition MB Megabyte A unit of storage that equals 1 048 576 bytes Memory A generic term for any device that stores digital information using magnetic media or digital chip storage device Menu A descriptive list of headings above nested functions that aid navigation to a specific operation These are found in computer applications with the heading at the top of a subset of like functions They are also on the Printer LCD control panel Monochrome An image composed of a single color Network A series of computers connected by data transfer cable for communication and sharing of functions and peripherals Oersted Oe The unit of magnetic field strength named after Dutch scientist Hans Christian Oersted who found the science of electromagnetism Offset The prescribed distance between a reference point and the target point The offset in card printing may refer to the position of the image relative to the leading edge or the distance of the start of magnetic encoding from the leading edge of the card O Ring A rubber ring used as a belt in several media driving applications OS Operating The instruction
200. er cleaner image UltraCard The Fargo brand of card stock recommended for use in Fargo Printers with the necessary glossy surface and composed of PVC UltraCard III The Fargo brand of card stock recommended for use in Fargo Printers that laminate with the necessary glossy surface and composed of PVC and PET to prevent heat distortion Update The process of installing a new revision of software or firmware to implement new changes to the Printer s command codes and procedures UPS Un interruptible An AC power supply typically powered by batteries which Power Supply provides temporary power to the PC or Printer during an interruption of the supply voltage Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 15 19 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition USB Universal Serial Bus A 1 5M sec 12Mbit sec serial communication interface that can support 127 separate devices consisting of 4 wires power ground data in and data out Virtual Memory A technique used by Windows when chip memory is exhausted in which data is written to the hard to hold data temporarily and support Window s operations Wrinkle The appearance in the card image of wavy or arched lines either colored or clear caused by improper film or Ribbon tension YMC The designation of colored Ribbon by the pan
201. ers a a m d EIE mE mc jal SS a i ee Fa TT eren Tyr DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 7 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Cleaning the Printhead Perform this procedure approximately every 1000 prints to maintain a consistent print quality Step Procedure 1 Open the Printer s Front Cover 2 Remove the Print Ribbon 3 Squeeze the Printhead Cleaning Swab to saturate the tip of the swab with alcohol 4 Use the Printhead Cleaning Swab to gently rub back and forth over the entire length of the Printhead 3 to 4 times 5 Once the Printhead is completely dry replace the Ribbon and close the Front Cover Printhecd DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 7 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Cleaning the Platen and the Card Feed Rollers Perform this procedure approximately every 1000 prints to maintain a consistent print quality Note The Card Feed Rollers move the card throughout the print process Rollers Fargo Electronics Inc should be kept clean to prevent card jams and card contamination This cleaning process will ultimately lead to better print quality and extended Printhead life Step Procedure 1 Open the Printer s Front Cover and remove the Print Ribbon DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 7 5 RE
202. esin Printer Supplies Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Ribbon Type 9 Full Color Resin Black 0 verlay Auto Ribbon Select System Color Management Algebraic Monitor System Color Management Color Matching Resin Dither DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 21 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Adjusting for the Resin Dither Select the appropriate dither method according to the type of image to be printed This option affects objects printed with a resin only Print Ribbon Step Procedure 1 Select Optimized for Photo when printing photo quality images with resin OR Select Optimized for Graphics when printing drawings and graphics e g clipart logos etc with resin rd DTC400 Card Printer Printing Preferences E X Magnetic Eneading Overlay Print Area K Panel Resin Printer Supplies Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Ribbon B Standard Resin sl Auto Ribbon Select Color Matching Sustem n alor Management Resin Dither MI Optimized for Graphics Optimized for Photos DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 22 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print Both Sides option Use this option to automatically print on both the frontside and backside of a card Step Procedure 1 Select this option in conjunc
203. etic Encoding Overlay Print Area Card Device Options Ribbon E Premium Resin Auto Ribbon Select Resin Dither Resin Heat Front 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 Resin Heat Back 0 1 i i 1 i i 1 Heat i E J Print Both Sides Disable Printing Print Back Side First DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 A xl Printer Supplies Calibrate X 6 32 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Resin Heat Front K option DTC300M Use this option to control the amount of heat the Printer uses when printing with the resin black panel s of a full color Ribbon or when printing with a resin only Ribbon by adjusting the Resin Heat slide Note This control can be helpful for fine tuning the transfer of resin text and bar codes Step Procedure 1 Select Resin Heat Front K or Resin Heat Back K as needed e Move the slide to the left to cause less heat to be used in the printing process causing resin images to be lighter or less saturated OR e Move the slide to the right to cause more heat to be used S DTC300M Card Printer Printing Preferences Magnetic Encoding Overlay Print Area Printer Supplies Card Device Options Calibrate Ribbon Type 2 Premium Resin T Auto Ribbon Select Resin Dither lo ntirrized for Graphics Resin Hes Fronts oo O IKI wun
204. ew the following information Symptom The Printer is unable to verify encoded data e Printer Error State The Printer is unable to verify encoded data e LCD Error Display Mag Verify e Driver Monitor Error Display Mag Verify Card Printer Mag Verity Error The erie ber punish enicadad dala Gheok the Cards ard clok en Cancel Print a ok DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 14 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Mag Verify Error continued Step Procedure 2 Check to ensure that the cards are loaded with the Magnetic Stripe facing Up and towards the front of the Printer 3 a Press on the Resume button b If the error continues continue to step 4 4 Verify the Driver settings if cards are loaded properly See the Using the Magnetic Encoding tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M procedure 5 Verify that data is being encoded to the Magnetic Stripe a Clear any Error Messages from the LCD by unplugging the Printer and reapplying power b Remove the failed card c Use a Magnetic Stripe reader or magnetic developer spray to determine if data is being written to the Magnetic Stripe d is not being written to the Magnetic Stripe e Open the front cover e Remove the Magnetic Module cover screw e Remove the Magnetic Module cover e Verify that the Magnetic Module is seated securely
205. file link labeled for the specific Printer model 3 Click on OK when prompted to Save this Program to Disk and then select a folder in which to save the Update file 4 a Once the file has been downloaded navigate to the location where the file was saved Note The Firmware Update file has been compressed for ease of downloading b Decompress the file by double clicking on the designated icon Selecting the Firmware File Step Procedure 1 Select the Select Firmware File to open a Browse Dialog Box 2 Browse to the location where the firmware file is located 3 Click on the OK button 4 The file name and Firmware Version will be displayed below File his T arslonz d im Firmware Version 2 0 4 526 004 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 10 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Placing the Printer in the Upgrade Mode Step Procedure 1 Disconnect Power from the Printer 2 Press and hold down the power and pause buttons on the Printer 3 Reapply power to the Printer Note The LCD display should now show Upgrade Firmware 4 Press the Yes button on the LCD to continue Upgrade Firmware No DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 11 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Sending the Firmware File Step Procedure 1 Ensure that the firmware File is
206. for the Printer to overlay and or print only in the space outside the standard location of an ISO Magnetic Stripe OR Select the Omit Signature Area option for the Printer to overlay and or print only in the space outside the standard location of a signature panel Note In the card grid black indicates the area in which the overlay and or printing will be applied DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 68 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Overlay Print Area dropdown menu continued X xl Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Magnetio Eneoding Print amp rea K Panel Aesir Pinter Suppies DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences CA 80Card Size Front C Back 7 wol C 0 0 Defined Area X Direction Card Travels through Printer Herta Overlay Pint Area Security Options Visual Security Solutions ForPrintand Overlay No Visual Security For Oveilay Only C FarPrint Only Overlay DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Overlay Print Area Use these Overlay Print Area options to control both the print and overlay together or control each individually Note Determine whether to use the Frontside option via the Front radio button or the Backsi
207. formation for an active document Windows should delete these files when the application is closed Test print A file stored in or generated through windows that is sent to the Printer to test basic functionality Thermistor An electronic resistor on the Printhead with a resistance value that varies in proportion to the heat to which it is exposed Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 15 18 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Thermocouple A device for measuring temperature using a junction of two wires of dissimilar metals that produce a voltage when heated that varies proportionally with the temperature Through hole A method of mounting circuit elements with the leads passing through holes in the circuit board and soldered on the opposite side Timeout An interruption of a print job that occurs when a function is not completed in the time allotted by the operating system TOF Top of Form The leading edge of the card as it travels through the Printer Track The area on a Magnetic stripe designated to contain the magnetic data string Troubleshooting The process of investigating and determining the cause of a problem TrueType TT A font format that produces each character using a mathematical equation rather than a graphical representation resulting in a much sharp
208. gs D900148 Tools Needed None Parts Needed Input Door D900148 Estimated Repair Time 5 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 a Grasp the Input Door Assembly D900148 by the sides with your thumb and forefinger b Compress the sides of the door by squeezing your fingers together and then gently pull the door of the Input Cover Note The Input Door is composed of a durable polycarbonate material and is able to withstand extreme flexibility before breaking 3 Replace the Input Door Assembly D900148 See previous display as needed DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 30 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 Refer to Drawings D900159 Tools Needed None Parts Needed Input Door D900092 Estimated Repair Time 5 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 31 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 continued Steps Procedure 2 a Grasp the Output Door Assembly D900092 by the sides with your thumb and forefinger b Compress the sides of the door by squeezing your fingers together and then
209. he Magnetic Door D9000107 3 Replace the Magnetic Door 09000107 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 37 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Magnetic Module Door D900107 continued Rear Cover 0900066 Screw 130984 Magnetic Door D9000107 Screw 130948 Screws 130984 Screw 130883 Access Cover 0900029 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 38 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Top Cover Assembly includes Print Circuit Board This procedure applies to these components DTC300 Top Cover Replacement 044304 includes Print Circuit Board DTC300 Flip Cover Replacement 044305 includes Print Circuit Board DTC300M Top Cover Replacement 044306 includes Print Circuit Board DTC300M Flip Cover Replacement 044307 includes Print Circuit Board DTC400 Top Cover Replacement 044308 includes Print Circuit Board Refer to Drawing D900100 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver No 2 Phillips Screw Driver Parts Needed Top Cover Assembly see above Estimated Repair Time 10 to 20 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution No 1 Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer A Caution No 2 Use caution when replacing the Top Cover Assembly see above because the Lid Sensor
210. he Magnetic Encoder Voltage Note The required encoder voltage for the cards will need to be known in order to properly set the Encoder Voltage Offset value This information should be available through the card manufacturer or reseller DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 110 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Adjusting the Hi Co Voltage Offset Step Procedure 1 Identify the Magnetic Encoder voltage required by the cards Note The required encoder voltage for the cards will need to be known in order to properly set the Encoder Voltage Offset value This information should be available through the card manufacturer or reseller 2 Use the following equation to identify the proper Mag Hi Co Voltage Offset value e 36500 lt Desired Voltage gt 4 6 1 23 1 2670 39 0625 40 X 1 For example Required Encoder Voltage 9vdc e 36500 9 4 6 1 23 1 2670 39 0625 40 X 1 15 3 Change the Mag Hi Co Voltage Offset value LE 15 4 Use the Diagnostic Utility to run a Magnetic Self test and verify encoded quality f DTC300 Card Printer Copy 1 Calibration mage Deines pe irTeolFnm ts PitEniolFom ggg TESTE TT NN CNN RN MagloCoVobaps Ofset 0 p ntes e DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 111 RESTRIC
211. he Printhead Cable Assembly D900035 8 102 Replacing the Fan Assembly D900033 8 104 Pulley Removal 8 106 Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley D840888 and the Platen Roller Drive Gear D900047 8 106 Replacing the Stepper Motor Idler Pulley Shaft Assembly D900089 and the Stepper Motor Drive Belt F000094 8 108 Flipper Table Replacement 8 110 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 vii RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 8 110 Section 9 Packing the Card Printer 9 1 Section 10 Board Level Diagnostics 10 1 Safety Messages review carefully 10 1 Sensor and Motor 10 2 Reviewing the Sensor Location and Voltages 10 2 Reviewing the Motor Voltages when active 10 2 Section 11 Diagnostic Tool Utility 11 1 Table of Contents 11 1 Using the Diagnostic Tool Utility 11 2 Selecting from the Printer Selection menu 11 2 Reviewing customized Diagnostic Utility tabs for your Printer 11 3 Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs 11 4 Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility 11 4 Selecting the Firmware Updates tab in the Diagnostics Utility 11 9 Downloading Firmware Updates 11 10 Selecting the Firmware File 11 10 Placing the Printer in the Upgrade Mode 11 11 Sending the Firmware File 11 12 Selecting the Mechanics tab in th
212. he elements of a graphic into a bitmap to be printed Reboot Cycling the power to the Printer so that it resets and reinitializes Registration The quality of the alignment of the separate primary color images YMCK Resident Font A set of characters loaded into the Printer memory that can be programmed to print those characters on the card without rasterizing the image Resin A semisolid material DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 15 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Red Green Blue Term Definition Resolution The number of individual pixel elements in a graphic taken over a given length used to indicate the sharpness of the picture and the level of detail The number of elements in the Printhead determines Fargo Printer resolution RFI Radio Electromagnetic waves radiated by poorly shielded cables or Frequency electronic devices that interferes with the operation or data Interference transfer of another device RGB The three primary colors of the luminance or additive model Combinations of these three colors can produce practically all the colors of the spectrum that humans can detect Computer monitors operate on an RGB model Ribbon The dye impregnated film that is used for color printing Ribbon cable Parallel wires held flat in a row by plastic insulation Ri
213. he right to a cause more heat to be used or b cause the resin image to be darker or more saturated Note This control can be helpful for fine tuning the transfer of resin text and bar codes D ye S5ub Intensity Ux E e RE DD Resin Heat Front Resin Heat Back 1 1 Overlay Heat 0 0 4 Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 42 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Overlay Heat O option Use this option to control the amount of heat the Printer uses when printing with the overlay panel of a Ribbon Note This control can be helpful for fine tuning the transfer of overlay onto the card Step Procedure 1 Move the slide to the left to cause less heat to be used in the printing process Note Certain card types may need additional heat for better transfer of the overlay material OR Move the slide to the right to cause more heat to be used Dye Sub Intensity aU Ux REGIS E PRUNUS AL NE JN NE NN Resin Heat Front alls Ox Resin Heat Back 0 Overlay Heat 01 F ETT Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 43 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Using the Color Matching option and Default button Fargo Electronics Inc Step Procedure 1 To return all options to their factory settings click on the Default button
214. hown below 8 Use the Torx T 10 screwdriver to attach the one 1 front Baseplate mount screws F000170 as shown below 9 Attach the Flipper Table Module Cover as shown below 10 Connect the USB and Power cables as shown below I a DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 16 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc DTC400 Card Printer Encoder Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit This section provides directions on adding a Card Flipper Module to your existing DTC400 Card Printer Encoder Introduction Upgrade Kit includes 1 DTC400 Card Flipper Module e Step by Step Instructional Guide Firmware and Driver Requirements e Your DTC400 Card Printer Encoder must have Firmware Version 2 0 2 or later and Driver Version 1 0 1 or later prior to installing the Card Flipper Module Tools Required e No 2 Phillips Screwdriver DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 17 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit Step Procedure Disconnect the Printer s power supply Step Procedure Use a No 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws from Printers Rear Cover Note Save these screws for later use in this procedure DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electro
215. i the card al DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 17 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the No Mag Installed Error continued Step Procedure 2 Press the Cancel Print button on the Driver Monitor Error Display Message 3 Reboot the Printer by cycling the power 4 Verify that the Printer has a Magnetic Encoder installed a Open the front cover b Remove the Magnetic Module cover screw c Remove the Magnetic Module cover d Verify that the Printer has a Magnetic Module installed Note If the Printer is equipped with a Magnetic Encoder Module ensure that it is seated securely into the Magnetic Module docking station If the issue persists replace the Magnetic Module See the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M service manual for replacement procedures 5 If the Printer has no Magnetic Encoder Module verify that the encoding data was sent in error check the appropriate software user s manual for encoding instructions DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 18 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Ribbon Sensor Error Ribbon Miscue All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom The Printer rolls through Ribbon and errors out e Printer Error State The Printer cannot find the next pan
216. ia between 2500 4000 Oe Coercivity ISO 7811 6 Fargo s High Coercivity encodes at 2750 Oe HTML HyperText A standard protocol used to format text files for use in a browser Markup Language or on the Internet HTTP HyperText A standard protocol by which computers can transfer data Transfer Protocol compatible through multiple platforms IC Integrated Circuit An electronic device that contains many individual circuits interconnected and placed within a discrete package ID Identification An abbreviation for identification Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 15 9 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition IEEE 1284 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 1284 A standard method of signaling for a bi directional parallel interface on personal computers To ensure proper Printer communications and image output Fargo recommends a parallel interface cable that complies with this specification Image A collection of pictures or graphical elements that compose the visual features on a card Also refers to the digital representation Input Any data or material being transferred to the Printer Input Hopper The area of the Printer that stores the blank cards ready to print Intermediate Transfer A thin flexible material coated with a resin material into whi
217. icated to executing a specific function A Printer that also laminates would have both a print engine and a lamination engine EOF End Of Form The trailing edge of the card detected to indicate when the Printer should stop printing EPP Enhanced Parallel Port A type of parallel port mode developed by Intel to increase the port throughput EPROM Electronically Programmable Read Only Memory A microchip based non volatile memory storage device that cannot be rewritten in the field Firmware for many Fargo Printers is stored on these chips and so a change of the chip is necessary for an upgrade Escape sequence A string or control character that indicates to the processor that what follows is a command and not data ESD ElectroStatic The discharge of static electricity high voltage low current that Discharge can damage electronic devices Ethernet A system of networking a series of computers for the sharing of data or peripherals Film A thin flexible transparent sheet used to carry dye impregnated material or resin to be transferred to the card Firmware The instruction set stored in chip memory inside the Printer that controls functional and operational data Some models require a chip change for updates some firmware can be changed by reprogramming from the PC DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 7 REST
218. ics Inc Running the Magnetic Self Test HiCo Only Perform a self test after a an initial setup of the Printer b a calibration procedure has been conducted or c a part has been replaced to check for proper Printer operation Step Procedure 1 Remove Ribbon Cartridge from the Printer and close the front cover Caution If the power is ON disconnect the Power Cable from the Printer s rear panel 2 Press and hold the Pause Resume button 3 While holding down the Pause Resume button plug the power cable back into the Printer 4 The Printer will Encode magnetic information on all 3 magnetic tracks DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 56 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 6 Printer Adjustments See this section for printer adjustments Table of Contents Section 6 Printer Adjustments Table of Contents Safety Messages review carefully Safety Messages review carefully DTC400 DTC300 Print Driver Options Reviewing DTC400 DTC300 and DTC300M Printer Drivers Reviewing DTC400 Printer Drivers Reviewing DTC300 Printer Driver Reviewing DTC300M Printer Drivers Using the Card tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Adjusting the Card Size Option Adjusting the Orientation Option Selecting the number of copies Using the Diagnostics button under the Card tab Using the Clean Printer Option Using the
219. ides option DTC300M Use this option to automatically print on both the frontside and backside of a card Step Procedure 1 Select this option in conjunction with any application program that supports a multiple page document duplex printing Note The program must be able to send down two or more separate pages to be printed within the same document e Page 1 will be transferred to the front side of the card e Page 2 will be transferred to the backside of the card Note The Printer Driver will always place all odd numbered pages on the front side of the card and all even numbered pages on the back side with this option selected If an odd number of pages are printed to the Driver while this option is selected then the Printer will print an additional blank side and transfer it to the card Disable Printing Prnt Back Side Only Rotate Front 180 Degrees Rotate Back 180 Degrees Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 36 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print Back Side First option Step Procedure 1 Select the Print Back Side First option If you need to print the first page of a two page document on the backside of the card OR If you need to print the resin black on the chip side of the Smartcard Note The second page of the document will be printed on the front side of the card Iv Print B
220. ight positions A to H as shown in the Portrait and Landscape samples below Sample 1 VeriMark Card Landscape Orientation 4 positions below Sample 2 VeriMark Card Portrait Orientation 4 positions below DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 84 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the Custom HoloMark Card Custom Graphic in a 2D foil The custom HoloMark image is stamped on blank standard sized cards You can select one of eight positions A to H as shown in the Portrait and Landscape samples below Sample 1 HoloMark Card Landscape Orientation 4 positions below Sample 2 HoloMark Card Portrait Orientation 4 positions below DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 85 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the K Panel Resin tab DTC400 DTC300 Select the K Panel Resin option to control where the resin black K panel of a full color Ribbon is printed e f printing with a resin only Ribbon type all Panel Resin options will be grayed out e Resin black text is desirable due to its sharp saturated black coloring and resin black bar codes are often required by Ultra Violet barcode readers to ensure readability when scanned rd DTC30D Card Printer Printing Preferences a Cad Deviea Options Calibrate Magnetic Enooding Overlay A Print Are k Bricker Supplies 00 Cad Ses 1
221. impression End Users will be able to choose between 8 different card placements 4 landscape and 4 portrait where the VeriMarkTM can be located When its time to print through the Driver the End User will select the location on their organizations card design around which no printing and overlay will be placed Custom HoloMarkTM Cards A Custom HoloMark TM Card is a three dimensional holographic image transferred to metal foil and embossed to blank cards The image is customer specific and the program mirrors our holographic laminates program with a couple exceptions Visual Security Card Stock Part Numbers All Visual Security Cards will be offered on the following Fargo Card Stocks only e P NNo 81754 Ultra Card e P NNo 81762 Ultra Card III with hi coercivity magnetic stripe e P NNo 81763 Ultra Card Ill Visual Security Fargo Certified Overlaminates Special Order in 50 quantity minimum e Part No 82255 PolyGuard 1 0 mil for HoloMarkTM and VeriMarkTM Cards Clear e Part No 82256 PolyGuard 1 0 mil for HoloMarkTM and VeriMarkTM Cards High Resolution Globe design hologram with Secure micro text Visual Security Card Stock Tolerances e Tolerance of base foil placement will equal 010 from the nearest edges of the card e Tolerance of layered foil will equal 010 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 6 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc VeriMarkTM Application Spe
222. ing Image Problems Resolving the Pixel Failure problems All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom A thin line or scratch travels the entire length of the card See sample image below e Printer Error State None e LCD Error Display None e Driver Monitor Error Display None 2 Check the card stock for scratches Replace the cards as needed 3 Examine the Printhead for visible damage 4 Clean the Printhead See the Cleaning the Printhead procedure 5 Replace the Printhead if the problem persists See Replacing the Printhead Assembly 0900023 Mike Berman Student 3957105 Library Code 2439 554 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 41 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Card Surface Debris problems All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Prints have spots white or colored voids and or dust on them See sample image below e Printer Error State None e LCD Error Display None e Driver Monitor Error Display None 2 Ensure the cards are clean and stored in a dust free environment Do not use cards with embedded contaminants in the surface 3 Clean th
223. ing a single wire Serial interface A sub D 9 pin input output port on the Printer used for serial communication with the PC for AS400 operating systems or for e card encoding SIMM Single In Line An array of memory chips attached to a printed circuit board that Memory Module installs in a slot on the main board Simplex Single sided printing SmartGuard An application from Fargo Electronics that allows users to prevent access to the Printer through the use of a personally encoded smart card SmartGuard SmartGuard is a Printer security option that uses a custom access card and a built in reader to restrict Printer access Only a valid access card can enable the Printer to print cards SmartShield This option allows the Printer to print custom security images on the card that reflect under a black or UV light source Smart Card Smart cards have an embedded computer circuit that contains either a memory chip or a microprocessor chip There are several types of smart cards Memory Contact Contactless Hybrid Twin Combi Dual Interface Proximity and Vicinity Software Instructions saved in computer memory that directs the computer to perform certain tasks and functions Spooler A computer application that allows the spooling of print jobs DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 17 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics
224. ing clip 140062 to the new Cleaning Roller before it is inserted into the Printer 13 Reverse to re assemble DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 100 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Cleaning Roller Lever D900051 continued See procedure on previous page Pinch Roller 0900098 Sp FOCIGEIB Card Cle anina Roller Platen Roller DOO Shaft Bushing Clean Roller Plate 0900102 Cleaning Raller Lever 0900051 Card Feed Roller Od ard Feed Roller a Maa Roller 0900049 ae ey Printhead Assemb ly 10900023 Bw 079 uch Laich 0900096 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 101 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Printhead Cable Assembly D900035 Refer to Drawings D900023 and D900110 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Printhead Cable D900035 Estimated Repair Time 30 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Turn the Printer over 4 Unscrew the one 1 thumbscrews 130887 that secures the Print Head Cover Plate to the Baseplate 5 Remove the Head Cover Plate 820253 6 Remove the Printhead See Replacing the Printhead Assembly D900023 7 Disconnect the Printhead Data C
225. ips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 Estimated Repair Time 15 minutes Steps Procedures Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Remove the Baseplate Assembly See Replacing the Baseplate D900000 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 63 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Headlift Motor Assembly E000806 and the Headlift Cam D900075 continued See previous page and following two pages for procedural steps stepper Motor Assy 0900082 Spring 000231 Rear Sideplate 0900013 3mm Flat Washer 140040 Pulley 0900089 Idler Post 0900037 Screw F000172 Screw FOO017 1 Input Feed Motor Assembly D900084 _ Cam Headlift Motor Assembly D900085 S Screw F OQD192 Screw FOOO1 1 Printhead Cam gt Lever 0900043 PCD RFID Antenna Assy A000365 DTC400 Headlift y xw Screw F000177 Ext Spring F000334 4
226. is depleted All Stop 17 The Thermistor engages Printhead Cooling Fan to maintain proper operating temperature 18 The Headlift Motor engages 19 The Print Headlift Sensor detects an open state 20 The Print Headlift Motor disengages 21 The Print Stepper Motor engages 22 The Print Ribbon Drive engages Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 1 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Sequence of Operations continued Step Process 23 The Card Feed Stepper Motor engages to queue card for magnetic encoding 24 The Encoding data is written to the card 25 The Magnetic Encoder verifies while the Stepper reverses the card 26 After Ribbon advances a few encoder clicks assume Ribbon free of card All Stop 27 Repeat steps 9 through 23 for the appropriate number of color overlay panels 28 The Card is ejected from the singled sided Printer OR The Card Feed Stepper engages to queue the card for the Flipper Table for the dual sided Printer 29 All Stop DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 1 6 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Boot up Sequence Step Process 1 On Power up the Printer checks the current state of the Card Feed Sensor and the Headlift Sensor 2 If the Headlift Sensor is f
227. ith an ISO smart card contact station This allows the user to write to the smart card chip with a standard RS 232 interface in the back of the Printer or with the optional built in encoder Edge to Edge Refers to the maximum printable area on a card resulting in printed cards with virtually no border ECP Mode Enhanced Capabilities Port Mode A type of parallel port mode developed by Microsoft to increase the port throughput and improve performance EE Memory An abbreviation for EEPROM EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory A microchip based non volatile memory storage device that can be rewritten in the field The chip can hold new values as the Printer adapts its operational parameters Encoder smart card An electro mechanical interface to transfer data from the PC to a chip or Magnetic Stripe built into the card DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Encoder wheel An electromechanical device attached to a shaft that detects the change in rotational position incremented to count ticks per revolution The Printer s encoder wheel both detects motion and measures the amount of rotation in the movement of the Ribbon Engine A generic term for a collection of systems and mechanisms that is ded
228. itive value to position a card to enter the Printer at a descending angle Maximum Adjustment Range The maximum adjustment range is 5 1 is approximately 1 degree Using the Flipper Center Offset Option Use this option to change the card position on the Flipper Table relative to the center for flipping Note This is important to maintain the proper clearance with surrounding objects when flipping a card Step Procedure 1 Enter a negative value to position a card closer to the output of the Printer when the Flipper is in home horizontal position Or Enter a positive value to position a card closer to the output of the Flipper Module when the Flipper is in home horizontal position Maximum Adjustment Range The maximum adjustment range is 127 As a rule 20 equals about 030 8 mm which is about the same as the thickness of a standard CR 80 size card Caution If the offset is set too high or low the card may jam in the Flipper Module when flipping DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 116 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Flipper Smart Angle Offset Option Use this option to change the Flipper angle relative to the default smart card loading position This is done in order to adjust travel to and from the Flipper and the Smart Card Docking Module Step Procedure 1 Enter a negative value to decrease the amount
229. ity images Parallel A method of data transfer in which serial data is divided into sections and sent simultaneously down parallel wires to speed transfer rate Parallel port A communication socket on a device that allows for parallel data transfer PC Personal Computer A stand alone programmable electronic device that can store retrieve and process data consisting of a CPU mouse keyboard and monitor PCB Printed Circuit Board A solid multi layered plate on which electronic elements are attached either through the board or on the surface Peel The removal of a film or Ribbon from a card surface at a perpendicular angle to ensure proper transfer then separation from the card surface Peel Off A bar on the lamination section that holds the film at the correct position and provides proper peel angle Peripheral Any device that is attached externally to a PC These often share the same data cable or port as a Printer and may be the source of communication problems DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 13 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Overlaminate Term Definition Pinch Roller A free spinning non Driven Roller that presses the card against the Drive Roller on the opposite side to ensure an adequate normal force for proper traction Pixel Short
230. ity problems 5 51 5 52 Port 15 14 Portrait 15 14 Portrait or Landscape 6 10 Portrait Landscape or Rotate 180 Degrees 6 46 positive negative Print Length value 6 108 POSITIVE NEGATIVE value 6 107 Potentiometer 15 14 Power Port 2 9 power data cables 5 36 Premium Resin Black K 2 11 prevents magnetic encoding 6 56 Print All Black With K Panel 6 90 print and overlay 6 64 Print Back Side First option 6 25 6 37 Print back side only 6 26 6 38 print both sides 6 23 6 24 6 36 Print Both Sides option 2 15 6 24 6 26 6 38 Print Drive Stepper 10 2 Print Driver 15 14 Print Job 15 14 Print K Only options 6 101 6 103 6 104 6 109 6 111 6 112 6 115 Print Length option 6 108 Print Method 2 4 Print Notification Application 3 1 Print Ribbons 2 10 Print Security Suite 3 2 Print Server 15 14 print the first page of a two page document 6 25 6 37 Print YMC Under K option 6 101 printable area 6 45 Printed cards dark or light 5 43 printed image diagram 6 47 Printer Driver setup screen 6 52 Printer Drivers 2 4 Printer s memory 6 45 Printhead 2 9 15 15 Printhead Assembly 8 59 8 60 Printhead Cable Assembly 8 102 8 103 Printhead power cable 5 36 Prox Card Encoder 15 15 Proximity cards 2 14 PVC 15 15 PVC laminate 2 14 Q Queue 15 15 R RAM Random Access Memory 15 15 Rasterize 15 15 Reboot 15 15 Registration 15 15 Fargo Electronics Inc Regulatory Compliances 2 2
231. le to un zip it as shown below Documents DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 11 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 10 Click on the Browse button on the WinZip Self Extractor window as shown below WinZip Self Extractor DTC400300 11 Lene To unzip all files in OTCAQ0S00 111 e e to the Unzip specified folder press the Unzip butten in Hun Unzip to Folder Ic OTC400_DTC300_ Firmware um Close v Overwrite files without prompting About Help DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 12 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 11 Select the Desktop then click on the OK button in the Browse for Folder dialog as shown below Rrowse for Folder Unzip to Folder 1 My Computer ee Local Diss icr 01 01 Saw Fargo 3 Es E FARGO 1 3 OE ssnyders on Ta ELSA Geldmine en FarpoFeO 1 ELS alma nm lark DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 13 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 12 Click on the Unzip button in the WinZip Self Extractor window to unzip designated files as shown below Winzip Self Extracto
232. locate information on the card Printer relating to a specification a procedural step a window or screen a component a term a qualifier or a related feature to this Printer RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Safety Messages review carefully Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes Danger A Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or serious injury Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent personal injury refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent personal injury always remove the power cord prior to performing repair procedures unless otherwise specified To prevent personal injury make sure only qualified personnel perform these procedures Caution A This device is electrostatically sensitive It may be damaged if exposed to static electricity discharges Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent equipment or media damage refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent equipment or media damage observe all established Electrostatic Discharge ESD procedures while handling cables in or near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies To prevent equip
233. location than the Driver s standard Omit Signature Area setting Note This area is indicated by the dashed outline e Determine the area size by actually printing a card and looking at it in the same orientation as when it exits the Printer 3 Measure the total size of the desired area and enter those dimensions into the dimension boxes Note The minimum size an area is 2 x 2 5mm x 5mm DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 73 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Defined Area Option continued Step Procedure 4 Measure from the lower left corner of the card up and over to the lower left corner of for the defined area to begin and enter these values into the X and Y boxes Note The card grid lines are spaced at 2 inch 5mm intervals CA 80 Card Size AZ ESS eS RR i o zs cape Defined Area c Direction Card Travels Through Printer Delete DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 74 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Defined Area Option continued Step Procedure 5 a Print the card design and observe how the image is oriented on the card as it ejects from the Printer Note The location of a defined area is based on the card orientation as it exits the Printer b Measure the defined area location based on th
234. mble Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 86 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Platen Roller D900041 continued Spring F300329 Poth Roles 9098 orn Tom Latch DOG v x hh Pisma fader S Ao oOOLL L oLOLOe Cod Clesecag I f j iS E Fre Siepie Areny fA 7 LUE S Cong Anika manii Meo Sinatra ice e XY i Gunpei Mang Beer a Y Fe A Encoder Screw FUMIE A ies GO De Ind Matos piii DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 87 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Card Cleaning or Feed Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 Refer to Drawing D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Retaining Ring Pliers Parts Needed Card Cleaning Roller D900040 Retaining Ring 140048 X1 Wave Washer 130951 X1 Estimated Repair Time 30 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D9
235. ment or media damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device e g a high quality wrist strap grounded to avoid potential damage To prevent equipment or media damage always remove the Ribbon and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs unless otherwise specified To prevent equipment or media damage take jewelry off of fingers and hands as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris before working on the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 1 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Overview Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Block Diagram Motors Sensors Parts 1 Card Feed 6 Card Feed 13 Card Input Roller 2 Print Stepper 7 Ribbon Sensor 14 Cleaning Roller 3 Ribbon Drive 8 Ribbon Encoder 15 Card Feed Roller 4 Print Headlift 9 Headlift Sensor 16 Printhead Cooling Fan 5 Ribbon Rewind 10 Printhead Thermistor 17 Card Input Hopper Motor 11 Ribbon LED SNR 18 Magnetic Encoding Head Module 12 RFID Antenna 19 Platen Roller 20 Pinch Roller DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Sequence of Operations The following sequence describes a full color print job with magnetic encoding Step Pr
236. ment problems continued 5 52 Resolving the Poor Image Quality problems 5 53 Running the Self Test 5 54 Running the Standard Self Test Print 5 55 Running the Magnetic Self Test HiCo Only 5 56 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Safety Messages review carefully Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes Danger A Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or serious injury Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent personal injury refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent personal injury always remove the power cord prior to performing repair procedures unless otherwise specified To prevent personal injury make sure only qualified personnel perform these procedures Caution A This device is electrostatically sensitive It may be damaged if exposed to static electricity discharges Information that raises potential electrostatic safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent equipment or media damage refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent equipment or media damage observe all established Electrostatic Discharge ESD procedures while handling
237. ments does not imply that Fargo is an ISO certified company at this time ANSI ISO ASQ Q9001 2000 American National Standard sub title Quality Management Systems Requirements published by the American Society of Quality Quality Press P O Box 3005 Milwaukee Wisconsin 53201 3005 The ASQ ISO 9000 2000 Handbook editors Charles A Cianfrani Joseph J Tsiakals and John E West Second Edition published by the American Society of Quality Quality Press 600 N Plankinton Avenue Milwaukee Wisconsin 53203 Juran s Quality Handbook editors Joseph M Juran and A Blanton Godfrey Fifth Edition McGraw Hill Any questions regarding changes corrections updates or enhancements to this document should be forwarded to Fargo Electronics Incorporated Support Services 6533 Flying Cloud Drive Eden Prairie MN 55344 USA 952 941 9470 800 459 5636 FAX 952 941 7836 www fargo com E mail sales fargo com DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 ii RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Table of Contents Section 1 Introduction 1 1 How to use the manual 1 1 Safety Messages review carefully 1 2 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Overview 1 3 Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Block Diagram 1 3 Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Sequence of Operations 1 4 Re
238. move the Printers rear cover b Use a digital volt meter to place the Positive lead to pin 9 of the J 4 Main Board connection and the negative lead to pin 12 of the J 4 Main Board connection e The blocked Sensor should read 4 99 vdc The open Sensor should read 1 5 vdc Ifthe Card Feed TOF Sensor does not read properly replace the Sensor 6 Clean the Card Feed Roller DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 10 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Antenna is Corrupted All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Printer RFID Sensor does not detect a recognizable signal from the Ribbon e Printer Error State The Ribbon tag information is corrupted or incorrect e LCD Error Display Ribbon RFID Error e Driver Monitor Error Display Ribbon RFID Error DTC30Q Card Printer A Ribbon RFIE Error The nbben lag informatio ip comptada imet Fiealace the Fibber erd presas To canos olek en Cancel Frlnt 435 Esca Fin Heb DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 11 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Antenna is Corrupted continued Step Procedure 2 Replace the Print Ribbon a
239. move the Stepper Motor Assembly See Replacing the Stepper Motor Assembly 0900087 Use a Retaining Ring Pliers remove the retaining ring 140048 from the Cleaning Roller Shaft Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 50 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Clean Roller Plate D900102 continued Steps Procedure 8 Slide the Card Drive Gear 810266 off of the Cleaning Roller Shaft Caution Use caution when sliding the Gear past the Encoder Wheel If the Encoder Wheel is damaged in any way it must be replaced See replacing the Encoder Wheel 9 Remove the Wave Washer 130951 10 Use a Small Flathead Screwdriver to gently pry the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing arm D900046 out about 2mm 11 Rotate the Roller Locking Shaft Bushing Counter Clockwise 1 8 of a turn 12 Remove the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing 13 Pull out the Cleaning Roller D900040 14 Replace the Card Clean Roller D900040 See Replacing the Card Clean Roller D900040 left of Platen and the Card Drive Gear 810266 Caution sure to add the retaining clip 140062 to the new Cleaning Roller before it is inserted into the Printer 15 Reverse to re assemble DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 3 8 51 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Clean Roller Pl
240. mputer can cause communications errors a Access the temporary files by following this process e Search for all folders called TEMP Once found clear out the contents of the folders e fusing Windows 98SE Me 2000 XP run the System Utility Disk Defragmenter found in the Accessories folder of the Start Menu e Use a disk cleanup utility such as Disk Cleanup found in the System Tools folder of the Start menu or use a third party application DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Print Process Errors All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Cards will not feed off the Hopper Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Cards will not feed at all e Printer Error State Card is not being detected by the Card TOF Sensor 11 seconds after the initiation of a print job causing the Printer to produce an error e LCD Error Display Card Not Fed e Driver Monitor Error Display Unable to Feed Card DTC304 Card Prinber AL Unable to Feed Card Tha Printer ik unable ke paed a card Mam iha Inge Enpara ihal caide are syaleble and losced and pereas the Resume butar 14 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 6 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc
241. n below 12 Remove the Encoder Sensor 13 Reverse to reassemble Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 55 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor D840980 continued See previous page for related procedure Rewind Backplate D900096 Washer 140040 Screw FO00170 x PCB 53 Sensor 2 Screw A000126 F000177 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Fargo Electronics Inc Ribbon Motor 0840980 8 56 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Board Interface and Printhead Replacements Replacing the Power Communication Board A000368 Refer to Drawing D9001 15 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Power Communication Board A000368 Estimated Repair Time 20 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap 0900064 5 a Remove the
242. near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies To prevent equipment or media damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device e g a high quality wrist strap grounded to avoid potential damage To prevent equipment or media damage always remove the Ribbon and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs unless otherwise specified To prevent equipment or media damage take jewelry off of fingers and hands as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris before working on the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 10 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Sensor and Motor Reviewing the Sensor Location and Voltages Use this table as a reference tool for Board Level Diagnostics Fargo Electronics Inc Sensor Location Pin Low Range VDC High Range VDC RFID Board J5 3 Present 02 Not Present 70 Headlift J9 1 3 Not Depressed Depressed 0 17 4 9 5 5 Print Cover Sensor J4 1 2 Not Depressed Depressed Sensor mounted to 0 17 4 9 5 5 Main Board Print Ribbon Encoder J4 3 4 Unblocked 0 17 Blocked 4 9 5 5 Sensor Card Detection J4 Unblocked 0 17 Blocked 4 9 5 5 Sensor Reviewing the Motor Voltages when active Use this table as a reference tool for Board Level Diagnostics Motor Location Pin VDC Print Drive Stepper J3 4 4 Print Headlift J20 6 17 0 Ribbon Drive J20 8 5 DTC400
243. ng Firmware continued 12 7 Downloading Firmware continued 12 8 Downloading Firmware continued 12 9 Downloading Firmware continued 12 10 Downloading Firmware continued 12 11 Downloading Firmware continued 12 12 Downloading Firmware continued 12 13 Downloading Firmware continued 12 14 Downloading Firmware continued 12 15 Downloading Firmware continued 12 16 Placing the Printer in the Firmware Upgrade Mode 12 17 Placing the Printer in the Firmware Upgrade Mode continued 12 18 Sending the Firmware File 12 19 Sending the Firmware File continued 12 20 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Safety Messages review carefully Symbol Critical Procedures for Safety purposes Danger AN Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or serious injury Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the below e To prevent personal injury refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol e To prevent personal injury always remove the power cord prior to performing repair procedures unless otherwise specified e To prevent personal injury make sure only qualified personnel perform these procedures Caution A This device is electrostatically sensitive It may be damaged if exposed to static electricity dis
244. ng unauthorized use Adhesion The firm attachment of a material to the card surface confirmed by using the Tape Test pulling an applied piece of adhesive tape Scotch 600 or equivelent off the card at 1 sec in to see if any material is pulled off by the tape Algebraic A type of color matching that takes the colors value of pixels and applies them to an algebraic equation to adjust the levels of hue saturation and brightness ANSI American National Standards Institute The United States Representative to ISO providing standardization for U S Manufactures prior or in addition to acceptance by ISO AS400 An operating system running on a main frame DTC500 Fargo Printers are built with fonts saved in the Printer memory so users of AS400 can write escape codes and print from the Printer ASCII American Standard Code for A standard for processing information in computer processors An 8 bit character set of 255 decimal numbers each assigned to Information numbers letters punctuation and special characters Interchange AT Refers to an IBM standard in early computing with regard to the chipset and function of the parallel port set up in the BIOS B Black Black Dye Sublimation panels are distinguished from the black panel using resin by the use of B for dye sub black K denotes resin black Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3
245. nics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 2 Use the Select a printer to continue dropdown menu to select the Printer a Click on the Download Firmware button under Step 1 as shown below Fargo Diagnostics Utility DU TCAJD Cand Printer reading Fass Step 2 Select Freue Fie File Mama None Selected Firmware Version Mana Selected Step 3 Ensure that the printer is in Upgrade mode ipfe ation of Fors To placer tha pinbal ap praes made dick anthe Help Buttan step 4 Send _ DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 3 a Check that the Computer has an active Internet connection b Click on the Yes button as shown below biagutility The requires connection Eo the internet De you wart be continue DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 4 This will launch the Fargo Support page e Click on the Firmware selection box e Use the drop down menu to select the Printer e Click on the Go button as shown below FARGO FARGO Wob Biberi Feyra EEG Tech Suppor
246. nics Inc Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued Step Procedure 3 Firmly grasp the Card Exit Hopper and pull on one side to pop out the pivot pin from its mount hole Next slide the other pivot pin out in order to remove the Card Exit Hopper Step Procedure 4 Use a No 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the Printer s Output Cover mount screws Note Save these screws for later use in this procedure DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 19 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued Step Procedure 5 Pivot the lower end of the Output Cover in an outward motion to remove the Output Cover Step Procedure 6 Use a No 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the Card Flipper Module Cover Note Save these screws for later use in this procedure DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 20 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued Step Procedure 7 Place the Card Flipper Module next to the Printer Step Procedure 8 Connect the Card Flipper Module Communication Cable to connection J17 on the Printer s Main Board Note The Communication Cable is keyed to ensure a one way installation DTC400 DTC30
247. nics Incorporated Fargo gives vou the nghi bo use one copy ol ths Farge setae Software with a sng Fangs printer en a singe conmpuber berrira camaeted Ib a singe eermputer ar e a sngls emputer netwerk This leanas asg authorizes you to create and use er extra copy ol the softwere ona home lepiop compuler e long as the copy is never loaded in memory or virlual memey load at tre sare brie the solere ie bxaded en the prre compilar an whieh yo use the softwere Pe ee C dore accept the lerma of the license agreement Inscell amp hield lt Back Cancel DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 29 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 6 a Select the Complete option to install the following components e Printer Driver Software e Printer Driver User s Guide e Fargo Diagnostics Utility Note Selecting Custom will provide the option to select which components to install b Click Next to continue DTC3 00 Card Printer InstallShield Wizard Setup Type select Ihe setup oe to Install Floste selecti a celu hipe Complete 19 Al program Features wil installed Fequies the moat dish E Select which program Iealures vau want installed Recommended for advenced users Baok Canga DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual
248. nstallation DTC40Q Card PrinterEncoder DTC300 Card Printer Encoder DTC300M Card PrinterEnceder DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 26 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 3 Wait during the installation FA RGO Series d Please wait while installation completes DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 27 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 4 Click on the Next button to continue with the Setup program DTC300 Card Printer InstallShield Wizard ES xl Welcome to the InstallShield wizard for D T C300 Card Printer The Installs hied Wizard will install DTC XY Card Printer on your computer Ta continua click Next Cancel DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 28 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Printer Driver continued Step Procedure 5 Read the License Agreement Select the accept the terms of the license agreement option and click Next to continue nm 300 Card Printer InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following lleerise Fargo Electicrics Incorpoieted License Agresmert 1 Faiga Electro
249. nt Server A device used to connect and control a Printer on a network DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 14 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Printhead The device on a Printer that produces the image on the media PVC Abbreviation for polyvinyl chloride often called vinyl PVC is the component of the 0 002 thick clear dye receptive film on the surface of the identification card and is the primary component of the identification card cores Queue A sequence of files or sets of data awaiting transmission or processing Proximity Prox Card Proximity cards allow access and tracking utilizing contactless technology usually by communicating through a built in antenna Prox Card Encoder The Fargo prox card encoder uses an HID ProxPoint Plus reader mounted on the e card docking station inside the Printer encoder The ProxPoint is a read only device producing a Wiegand signal that is converted to RS 232 using a Cypress Computer Systems CVT 2232 Application programs can read information from HID prox cards via a RS 232 signal through a dedicated DB 9 port on the outside of the Printer labeled Prox RAM Random Access Memory A storage device for digital information to be held temporarily to facilitate processing Rasterize The process of converting t
250. o or more cards feed at the same time causing the cards to jam at the Card Hopper Roller Printer is out of cards e Printer Error State Card is not being detected by card TOF Sensor 11 sec after the initiation of a print job causing the Printer to produce an error e LCD Error Display Card Not Fed e Driver Monitor Error Display Unable to Feed Card OTC 300 Card Printer A Unable to Feed Gard The unable te feed a sard Iram Iha Irau Enpre ihal gards are syaleble and losced snd pereas the Resume butar x w DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 9 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Card Not Fed Error Two 2 or more card feed at the same time continued Step Procedure 2 Check card quality loading a Remove cards from the Card Hopper b Ensure that the cards are not sticking together by fanning them out and then lining them back together in a straight deck c Press the Card Hopper Load Lever down until the Card Tray locks into place d Load up to 100 cards into the Hopper with the print side down e Close the Card Hopper Cover to release the Card Tray f Press on the Resume button g Ifthe cards do not feed continue to Step 3 3 Press the Cancel Print button on the Driver Monitor Error Display Message 4 Reboot the Printer by cycling the power 5 Check Card Feed TOF Sensor a Re
251. ocedure 1 Select the Front radio button to enable the Frontside option Note This enables all K Panel Resin functions as shown below f DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences Card Device ptione Image Color Calbrate Magnetic Encoding E amp PanelResk Pi rter Suppliss tH PT TT TT e LL LLL LT LLLI E jes bsr ped Destined ree X 1 Direction Card Travels through Prier Delete Print All Alack wilh E Pare Full Card M Defined Undefined Area s f Prt under E DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 88 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Enabling the Backside option K Panel Resin Step Procedure Select the Back radio button to enable the Backside option Note This enables all K Panel Resin functions as shown below 1 gf DTC300 Card Printar Printing Prafarences Card Device Options Image Cor Magnetic Encoding vala t Pim Ara E Panel Resin Frinter Supplies CR B Card Size C Front 0 Back 0 200 hH ERE RE EZ E ee ER n fo 200 f LLL TL LLL LE EE ee Em esq owes ps bes pes 0000 X Ld ELT LA ELE Ld LI D o Y mete ce to o oo E Y HHH Ex deb IL LI L
252. ocess 1 The File information is received from the PC 2 Printer checks the installed Ribbon type stored in memory against the Ribbon type command that was sent from the Printer a If Ribbon type does not match the media light will begin flashing 3 The Card Input Motor and Print Stepper Motor engage 4 The Card Feed Sensor detects leading edge of card and disengages the card input Motor Continued on the next page Cartridge Bay DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 1 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Sequence of Operations continued Step Process Step Process 5 The Print Ribbon Drive engages 6 The Print Ribbon Sensor looks for the color transition from Yellow to Magenta Print Ribbon Encoder detects number of revolutions required to use an entire color panel 7 The Print Stepper Motor engages 8 The Card Feed Sensor detects trailing edge of card 9 The Print Stepper Motor queues card to the middle of the platen Roller All Stop 10 The Print Headlift Motor engages 11 The Print Headlift Sensor detects closed state 12 The Print Headlift Motor disengages 13 The Print Stepper Motor engages 14 The Print Cover Sensor checks for a closed state 15 The Ribbon Drive Motor engages 16 The Image data is burned by the Printhead until image data
253. on Magenta Panel K Resin Black Panel Clear Protective Overlay Panel Ultra Violet Flourenscing Panel DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 10 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Components Resin Only Print Ribbons Resin only Print Ribbons consist of a continuous roll of a single resin color No protective overlay panel O is provided since resin images do not require the protection of such an overlay The following resin only Ribbon types are available for use with both DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Type Description Standard Resin Black K provides 1 000 prints This Ribbon provides high resin durability ideal for most general purpose monochrome ID card applications Resin black bar codes are readable by both infrared and visible light bar codes scanners Premium Resin Black K provides 1 000 prints This Ribbon provides maximum resin durability ideal for applications such as access control where cards are repeatedly swiped through a Magnetic Stripe reader Resin black bar codes are readable by both infrared and visible light bar codes scanners Note Using a Premium Resin Black Ribbon will provide better photo realistic output Colored Resin provides 1 000 prints Several colored resin Ribbons are available in a variety of colors for customizing or color coding resin only ID cards Metallic Resin provides 500 prints Met
254. onfirm that the Driver is current by checking at www fargo com 3 Confirm the correct installation of the Flipper Table Module Assembly a Rebootthe computer b Ensure that the Print Both Sides option in the Printer Driver is set correctly c Verify the Flipper Table Module Assembly is functioning properly by printing out cards in a test run d If you are experiencing problems see Resolving the No Flipper Table Module problem DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Communication Errors continued Step Procedure 4 Determine the problem with printing from the application a Print a self test from the Printer by holding down the Pause button on power up to ensure that the Printer itself is functioning properly b Print the Windows test page that is located in the General tab of the Driver c Use WordPad a 2000 XP word processing program in the Accessories Program Group 1 Go to the File menu and select Page Setup 2 Click on the Printer button and select the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer 3 Click OK and reset all four margins to zero Note The WordPad will automatically replace the values with its minimum margins 4 Open the program and type This is a Test then go to File on the menu bar and select Print 5 Determine whether there is adequate hard Drive space Note A large volume of temporary files on the co
255. onics Inc Connecting the Printer power Follow this procedure Note Do not connect the Printer s USB cable until prompted during the Printer Driver installation Step Procedure 1 Plug the AC adapter power cable into the back of the Printer See Display A 2 Plug the wall power cable into the AC power adapter 3 Plug the wall power cable into a standard 110VAC power outlet Display A Shows back of Printer with AC power cable below DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 6 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Print Ribbon Cartridge The Fargo DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer uses a one piece disposable Ribbon Cartridge load system Every full color Ribbon Cartridge contains a 250 full color card count Ribbon and a Card Cleaning Roller Step Procedure 1 To install the Ribbon Cartridge simply open the front Cover by pressing the black rubber pad or touch pad and lowering the Cover down as shown below DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 7 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing the Print Ribbon Cartridge continued Step Procedure 2 a Remove the liner on the Card Cleaning Roller before installing the Cartridge as shown in Display A upper right arrow of display b Remove the Ribbon securing tape as shown in Display A middle right arrow of displa
256. ontinue CT C300 Card Frinter ESM AEs ek Teele Card Samples Magnete Encoding Select File File Name Nore Selected DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 8 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Firmware Updates tab in the Diagnostics Utility Step Procedure 1 Select the Firmware Updates tab as shown below Pango Diagnostics Utility FARGO Soe DTC300 Card Printer Meer _ Gell Card Samples Magnetis Enseeing Print Step 1 Dewnliad Firmas e Step 2 Firmas File File Name Nang Selecied Firmware Version Hans Selected Step 3 Ensure that the printer is in Upgrade mode Fer on how fo place he parker in upeede modes click the Helo Billo Ekis step 4 Send Fierce Heb DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 9 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware Updates Step Procedure 1 Select the Download Firmware button If you have Internet access this will automatically take you to the Firmware Updates section of the Fargo website If it does not manually open your browser and go to the Firmware Updates section in the Fargo Electronics Technical Support Web site http www FargoSupport com 2 Select your specific Printer model and click on the Submit button Click on the Firmware
257. ontinued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 53 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor D840980 continued Steps Procedure 7 Use a Torx T 10 Screwdriver to remove the three 3 screws F000178 that secure the Ribbon Supply Motor Assembly to the Printer side plate 8 Pull the Ribbon Take up Motor assembly off the Printer side plate e Note the position of the Ribbon and Head lift Sensor Cables for re assembly e When reassembling a small Needle Nose pliers will be needed to reattach the Ribbon Supply O ring belt 140212 A Caution Be sure to line the Encoder Wheel in the Encoder Wheel Sensor during Re Assembly Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 54 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Ribbon Motor Supply Assembly D900121 O Ring Drive Belt 140212 Encoder A000126 Sensor and Motor D840980 continued Steps Procedure 9 Use a Torx T 10 Screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws F000170 that secure the Motor D840980 to the Ribbon Supply Assembly as shown below 10 Remove the Motor 11 Use a Torx T 10 Screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws F000177 that secure the Encoder Sensor A000126 to the Ribbon Supply Assembly as show
258. or Matching 6 21 Color Matching software 6 21 Colored Resin 2 11 Colors 2 3 Communication Errors 5 4 5 5 Compressed air 15 3 Contrast 15 3 Contrast Gamma printed image 6 41 Control panel 15 3 CR 100 15 4 CR 79 15 4 CR 80 15 4 CR 80 card size front back 6 91 6 92 6 93 CR 90 15 4 CSA 2 2 CSA Certified 2 2 Cursor 15 4 customized ID software applications 6 61 D Darkness 15 4 Data Cables 5 36 DB 9 15 4 DC Direct Current 15 4 DC Motor 15 4 Default 15 4 Default button 6 44 6 51 default ISO Standard selections 6 54 6 58 default location 6 95 defined area 6 75 Defined Area arrows 6 76 Defined area s 6 94 Defined Area s check box 6 94 6 95 6 96 6 100 6 101 6 103 6 104 6 109 6 111 6 112 6 115 Defined Area s option 6 68 6 73 6 92 Defined undefined area s 6 91 6 93 Defrag 15 4 Delete button 6 76 Device Option tab 5 29 Diagnostic Utility Diagnostics Tool 6 12 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 16 1 RESTRICTED USE ONLY dimension boxes 6 95 DIP switches Dual In line Package Switches 15 4 Direct to Card DTC Printing 15 5 Disable Printing option 6 28 6 40 Disables Magnetic Verification 5 55 disk cleanup utility 5 5 Dither 15 5 DMA Direct Memory Access 15 3 Dongle 15 5 Dot 15 5 Dot pitch 15 5 Download 15 5 DPI Dot Per Inch 15 5 DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory 15 5 Drive
259. or State Headlift Sensor is not detecting movement from the Headlift Cam e LCD Error Display Head Lift Error e Driver Monitor Error Display General Error DTC400 Card Printer Copy 1 x Headlift Error The Sensi is not debscling movement From Be Headitt Carn Reheat the by cpsing power Ta canes press the Caneal Print button DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 32 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Headlift Motor or Sensor Error continued Step Procedure 2 Press the Cancel Print button on the Driver Monitor Error Display Message 3 Reboot the Printer by cycling the power Cycle the Headlift Motors a Use the Fargo Diagnostic utility to cycle the Printhead to ensure proper printhead operation See the Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs a Verify that the Headlift Motor turns If the Motor does not turn or jams continue to Step 5 Check the Headlift Motor Main Board Connection J20 a Unplug the Printer b Remove the back cover c Verify that connection J20 is properly connected to the Main Board d If the Motor does not turn continue to Step 7 Test the Headlift Sensor a Remove the back cover b Attach the positive lead from a Digital Voltmeter to Pin 1 of J9 Attach the negative lead to the Pin of J9 e f open the Sensor should read 0 17 to 0 9 VDC e f closed the Sensor should rea
260. orage device The Printer uses this to buffer a print job transferred from the PC until the Printer contRoller is able to process the packet Driver Software utility installed in Windows that interfaces an application to rasterize image data and include command codes so the Printer can process the file Duplex Printing Printing on the front and the back of the card Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 15 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Dwell Time The speed at which the card moves across the lam Roller measured in seconds inch secs in This may be adjusted in the Driver to ensure adhesion and card flatness Dye Migration The diffusion of dye out of the card surface and into another receptive surface such as a vinyl pouch card holder resulting in a faded image Dye Sublimation Also called dye diffusion thermal transfer it is the process of heating a dye suspended in a cellulous substrate until the dye can flow diffusing into the dye receptive surface of the card or InTM This produces the image in the surface of the card E card An abbreviation for electronic card A generic term used to reference any card with built in electronic devices such as smart cards or prox cards E card Docking Station The device in the Printer that accepts smart cards w
261. oth Sides Disable Printing Rotate Front 180 Degrees Rotate Back 180 Degrees Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 37 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Print Back Side Only option Use this option to print only onto the backside of cards Step Procedure 1 Select this option to print only onto the backside of preprinted cards that must have their Magnetic Stripe or smart card chip encoded Note Load the cards in the standard manner e When this option is selected the Print Both Sides option is automatically disabled e When attempting to print a two page document if Print Back Side Only is selected the first page of the document will print on the backside of the card e The second page of the document will then be printed on the back of a second card Print Both Sides Disable Printing rit Le Rotate Back 180 Degrees Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 38 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Rotate Front 180 Degrees or Rotate Back 180 Degrees options Use this option to change the position of the printed image in relation to the set location of a card s Magnetic Stripe or smart chip Step Procedure 1 Select the Rotate Front 180 Degrees option to rotate the image on the front of the card by 180 degrees when printed OR Select the Rot
262. ound to be open the Headlift Motor will turn until a closed state is seen 3 If the Card Feed Sensor is found to be blocked the Card Feed Stepper will engage to eject the card DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 1 7 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 2 Specifications The purpose of this section is to provide the User with specific information on the Regulatory Compliances Agency Listings Technical Specifications and Functional Specifications for the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Table of Contents Section 2 Specifications 2 1 Table of Contents 2 1 Regulatory Compliances 2 2 Agency Listings 2 3 Technical Specifications 2 3 Technical Specifications continued 2 4 Technical Specifications continued 2 5 Visual Security Solutions Specifications 2 6 VeriMarkTM Cards 2 D holographic foil application 2 6 Custom HoloMarkTM Cards 2 6 Visual Security Card Stock Part Numbers 2 6 Visual Security Fargo Certified Overlaminates Special Order in 50 quantity minimum 2 6 Visual Security Card Stock Tolerances 2 6 VeriMarkTM Application Specifications 2 7 HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM Application Specifications 2 7 Functional Specifications 2 8 Printer Components Front Cover to USB Port 2 9 Printer Components Print Ribbons 2 10 Printer Components Resin Only Print Ribbons 2
263. prevent equipment or media damage refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent equipment or media damage observe all established Electrostatic Discharge ESD procedures while handling cables in or near the Circuit Board and Printhead Assemblies To prevent equipment or media damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device e g a high quality wrist strap grounded to avoid potential damage To prevent equipment or media damage always remove the Ribbon and Cards from the Printer before making any repairs unless otherwise specified To prevent equipment or media damage take jewelry off of fingers and hands as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris before working on the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Safety Messages review carefully Symbol Critical Instructions for Safety purposes Danger A Failure to follow these installation guidelines can result in death or serious injury Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol as shown to the left To prevent personal injury refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol To prevent personal injury always remove the power cord prior to performing repair procedures unless otherwise specified
264. r DTCA400300v111 exe To unzip all files in DTC400300 111 exe to the specified folder press the Unzip button Hun winzip Unzip to folder C Documents and Settings4s55 Browse Close M DOverarite files without prompting About Help fin wince see ea DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 14 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 13 Click on the Select Firmware File button under Step 2 in the Fargo Diagnostic Utility window as shown below Fargo Diagneosbics LEY File Name Mong Selected Firmware Version More Salected Step 3 Ensure that the printer is in Upgrade mode Far mig malanan how bo places Ee pinier in upgrade mode click on the Hap Bulon Step 4 Send Firmar DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 15 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 14 e Select the Desktop dropdown menu e Click on the frm file e Click on the Open button as shown below 15 This completes the Downloading Firmware procedure Browse for Firmware UE Xl re EL Computar Recent Network Places SERM o30TC 00300VL1 LIOTE cleaning My Documents My Documents mr Computer Fie name DTC 4003004117 Fm LT T ku
265. r 15 5 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer 9 1 Duplex Printing 15 5 Dwell Time 15 6 Dye Migration 15 6 Dye Sub Intensity setting 5 45 Dye Sublimation 2 8 15 6 Dye Sublimation Cyan Panel 2 10 Dye Sublimation Magenta Panel 2 10 Dye Sublimation Yellow Panel 2 10 Dye Sublimation Only Print Ribbons 2 12 E E card 15 6 E card Docking Station 15 6 ECP Mode Enhanced Capabilities Port Mode 15 6 Edge to Edge 15 6 EE Memory 15 6 EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory 15 6 embedded contaminants 2 14 5 42 Emissions Standards 2 3 EN 60950 1 2001 2 2 Enable MLE Support checkbox 6 56 Encoder smart card 15 6 Encoder wheel 15 7 encrypted secure code 3 1 End Sentinel ES 6 61 Engine 15 7 EOF End Of Form 15 7 EPP Enhanced Parallel Port 15 7 EPROM Electronically Programmable Read Only Memory 15 7 EPROM version number 5 54 5 56 Escape sequence 15 7 ESD 1 2 6 4 6 5 7 2 8 4 10 1 ESD ElectroStatic Discharge 15 7 Ethernet 15 7 excessive resin printing problems 5 48 exposed to static electrical discharges 7 3 F Fargo Secure Print Security Suite 3 1 Fargo Technical Support 13 1 Fargo Technical Support via the Web 13 1 Fargo Electronics Inc FCC 2 2 feed card into encoder 5 5 Field Separator FS 6 61 Film 15 7 Firmware 15 7 five 5 applications 3 2 Flash Memory 15 8 Flipper Table Module 2 15 Font 15 8 For Ove
266. r and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 91 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Input Pusher D900104 continued Steps Procedure 4 Remove the Printer Baseplate See Replacing the Baseplate 0900000 5 Remove the Flange Bearing F000350 that connects the Input Pusher D900104 to the Card Input Shaft D900052 and Spring F000337 as shown on the next page Continued on the next page Flange Bearing F no3sS0 i af m Pusher 0900104 Card Input ee wae sd Front Sideplate Assembly DAO 00H at Screw 0002371 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 92 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Card Feed or Exit Roller D900042 and the Card Drive Gear 810266 Refer to Drawing D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Retaining Ring Pliers Parts Needed Card Cleaning Roller D900042 Retaining Ring 140048 X1 Wave Washer 130951 X1 Estimated Repair Time 15 minutes Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 090014
267. r more card feed at the same time 5 9 Resolving a Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Antenna is Corrupted 5 11 Resolving a Ribbon RFID Error Ribbon RFID Sensor is Corrupted 5 13 Resolving the Mag Verify Error 5 14 Resolving the No Mag Installed Error 5 17 Resolving a Ribbon Sensor Error Ribbon Miscue 5 19 Resolving a Ribbon Break Jam Error 5 21 Resolving a Ribbon Out Error 5 23 Resolving a No Ribbon Installed Error 5 24 Resolving a Invalid Ribbon Error 5 26 Resolving a Wrong Ribbon Error 5 28 Resolving a Card Jam Error 5 30 Resolving a Headlift Motor or Sensor Error 5 32 Resolving the Cover Open Error Message 5 33 Resolving the Blank Output issues 5 35 Flipper Table Module Assembly Problems 5 38 Resolving the No Flipper Table Module problem 5 38 Resolving the Flipper Jam Error 5 39 Diagnosing Image Problems 5 41 Resolving the Pixel Failure problems 5 41 Resolving the Card Surface Debris problems 5 42 Resolving the Incorrect Image Darkness problems 5 43 Resolving Ribbon Wrinkle problems 5 45 Resolving the Excessive Resin Printing problems 5 47 Resolving the Incomplete Resin Printing problems 5 49 Resolving the Image Placement problems 5 50 Resolving the Poor Image Quality problems 5 53 Running the Self Test 5 54 Running the Standard Self Test Print 5 55 Running the Magnetic Self Test HiCo Only 5 56 Section 6 Printer Adjustments 6 1 Table of Contents 6 1 Safety Messages review carefully 6 4 Safety Messages review carefully 6 5 DTC400 D
268. rewdriver Retaining Ring Pliers Parts Needed Card Cleaning Roller D900042 Retaining Ring 140048 X1 Wave Washer 130951 X1 Estimated Repair Time 30 minutes Steps Procedure OI Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover 0900066 3 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly 0900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 4 Remove the Card Output Door and Left End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly D900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap D900064 5 Use a Retaining Ring Pliers to remove the retaining ring 140048 from the Card Exit Roller Shaft 6 Slide the Card Exit Gear 810266 off of the Roller Shaft 7 Remove the Wave Washer 130951 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 99 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Cleaning Roller Lever D900051 continued Steps Procedure 8 Use a Small Flathead Screwdriver gently pry the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing arm D900046 out about 2mm 9 Rotate the Roller Locking Shaft Bushing Counter Clockwise 1 8 of a turn as shown below 10 Remove the Roller Shaft Locking Bushing 11 Pull out the Pinch Roller D900098 12 Replace the Pinch Roller D900098 Caution sure to add the retain
269. rify that the Ribbon type selected matches the Ribbon installed in the Printer Note The Printer Driver will change the Ribbon type to the correct setting or validate It will also display a dialog that it has changed the current setting or that the current Ribbon type is correct amp f DTC3UUM Card Printer Printing Preferences BE oxi MacnelicEncadng Print Printer Supplies Card Device Options Fibton Tine Alp Ribizon Select plimizad far Graphics Aasin ux 7 Resh D khar Haal Back Oo x I Seek 0 5 Print Both Sides Disable Printing Poni Back Side First D Print Slee Orly Ralale Fron 180 Decrees Rotal Back 180 Degrees Datault Hap DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 31 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Adjusting for the Resin Dither DTC300M Fargo Electronics Inc Select the appropriate dither method according to the type of image to be printed This option affects objects printed with a resin only Print Ribbon Step Procedure clipart logos etc with resin OR 1 Select Optimized for Graphics when printing drawings and graphics e g Select Optimized for Photo when printing photo quality images with resin i DTC300M Card Printer Printing Preferences Magn
270. rinthead Assembly D900023 Refer to Drawing D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Phillips Head Screwdriver Parts Needed Printhead D900023 Estimated Repair Time 15 minutes Warning If oil or debris makes contact with the Printhead elements wipe the glass coated area of the Printhead immediately with a Printhead Cleaning Swab See Cleaning the Printhead in Section 5 Steps Procedure Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 Turn the Printer on its back 3 Unscrew the thumb screws 130883 4 Remove the Access Cover D900029 5 Grasp the two plastic tabs on each side of the Printhead Assembly D900023 squeeze them together pivot them upward and pull out 6 Guide the Printhead Assembly D900023 between the side Plates and out of the Printer Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 59 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Printhead Assembly D900023 continued Steps Procedure 7 Disconnect the cables from the Printhead Assembly See below 8 Replace the Printhead Assembly D900023 See below 9 Reverse to re assemble DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 60 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Printhead Assembly D900023 continued Spring c LE AS
271. rk not defined Unpacking and Inspection 4 4 Reviewing the Printer front view 4 4 Reviewing the Printer front view Cartridge being installed 4 5 Reviewing the LCD top front part of Printer 4 5 Connecting the Printer power 4 6 Installing the Print Ribbon Cartridge 4 7 Installing the Print Ribbon Cartridge continued 4 8 Installing the Print Ribbon Cartridge continued 4 9 Installing Blank Cards into the Card Hopper 4 10 Installing Blank Cards into the Card Hopper continued 4 11 Installing Blank Cards into the Card Hopper continued 4 12 Lowering the Card Output Hopper 4 13 Flipper Table Module Installation 4 14 Installing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 4 14 Installing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 continued 4 15 Installing the Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 continued 4 16 DTC400 Card Printer Encoder Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit 4 17 Introduction 4 17 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit 4 18 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued 4 19 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued 4 20 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued 4 21 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued 4 22 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued 4 23 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued 4 24 Installing the Card Flipper Module Upgrade Kit continued 4 25 Printer Driver Installation 4 26 DTC400 DTC300 DTC
272. rlay Only 6 70 For Print and Overlay 6 70 FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array 15 8 Front and Back radio buttons 2 15 Front Cover 2 9 Frontside and Backside options K Panel Resin 6 87 6 88 6 89 Overlay Print Area 6 65 Full bleed 15 8 Full Card option 6 68 6 91 G Gamma 15 8 Glossy Matte 15 8 Glossy PVC 15 8 Graphical Device Interface GDI 15 8 Gray Scale 15 8 H Halftoning 15 8 Hard Drive 15 9 hard Drive space adequate or inadequate 5 5 HDP High Definition Printing 15 9 Head 15 9 Headlift Motor Assembly 8 63 8 65 8 66 Headlift Motors 5 33 Headlift Sensors 5 33 Heat Seal 15 9 Heat sink 15 9 HiCo High Coercivity 15 9 High Coercivity Magnetic Head Assembly Replacement 8 75 high resolution 24 bit color images 5 53 Horizontal adjustment 6 47 HTML HyperText Markup Language 15 9 HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol 15 9 Humidity 2 4 I IC Integrated Circuit 15 9 ID Identification 15 9 ID format 6 23 6 36 Identification Card sample 6 95 IEEE 1284 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 1284 15 10 Image 15 10 Image Color tab 6 21 6 41 Image Darkness option 6 106 Image Placement 5 51 5 52 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 16 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Image Placement option 6 107 image placement problems 5 51 Image Placement value 6 107 Image Position controls 6 46 inches or mm option 6 9 inco
273. rrect image darkness problems 5 44 increase Printhead heat 6 106 Input 15 10 Input Feed Motor Assembly E000806 8 67 8 68 Input Feed Roller D900049 8 67 Input Hopper 15 10 Integrator specific SecureMark media 3 2 Interface 2 4 Intermediate Transfer Media InTM 15 10 internal Printer settings 6 45 ISO 15 10 ISO 7811 2 Magnetic Stripe 6 60 ISO encoded data format 6 53 ISO Standard selections 6 58 ISO Standard settings 6 51 ISO Track Locations 6 60 ITS EMC 2 2 ITS EMC 2 2 J JIS II Japanese Industrial Standard 15 10 K K Panel 15 10 K Panel Resin options 6 76 6 100 K Panel Resin tab 6 90 L Lamination 15 10 Lamination Drive 10 2 Lamination Drive Stepper 10 2 Lamination Roller Lift 10 2 Lamination Sensor Calibration 5 55 LAN Local Area Network 15 10 Landscape 15 11 Landscape orientation 6 46 LCD Liquid Crystal Display 15 11 LED Light Emitting Diode 15 11 less heat more heat 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 42 6 43 LoCo Low Coercivity 15 11 LPT Port Line Printer Port 15 11 LRC Generation 6 58 LRC Generation Mode 6 58 M magnetic data 6 113 Magnetic Encoder 5 18 Magnetic encoding 15 11 Magnetic Head Assembly Replacement 8 75 Magnetic Offset option 6 113 Magnetic Offset value 6 113 Magnetic stripe 15 11 Fargo Electronics Inc Magnetic Stripe Encoding Module 6 50 Magnetic Stripe reader 5 15 Magnetic Track 15 11 Magnetic Track Options 6 5
274. ry authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom The Print Ribbon has become jammed or has broken in the Printer e Printer Error State The Ribbon Supply Encoder Sensor has unexpectedly stop receiving information from the Ribbon Encoder e LCD Error Display Ribbon BreakJam e Driver Monitor Error Display Ribbon BreakJam DTC300 Card Printer A Ribbon A boon breakejan has debeched inside the printer Open ia Piniers Front Cover and reves the Abhor Clas ary Gade in khe pibe by using the Fonsard and or Revere ceed an tha Printers Top Gaver Tage tha erdt al ta ben tagelbher arel wind np anta the Takeup Spool ol the Ribon Inet the Ribbon Ligas acd cles tha Printers Frank Cavar Press the Cancel Pret bulbar fren the D aply Dialog end resend ihe pink joo W o Emm DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 21 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a Ribbon Break Jam Error continued Step Procedure 2 Open the front cover and remove the Ribbon Cartridge e f Ribbon is broken continue to Step e f Ribbon is in good condition continue to Step 6 Adjust the print offset See the Using the Print Top of Form Option procedure If the issue persists continue to Step 4 Repair the Ribbon and wind up th
275. s Note Load the cards in the standard manner e When this option is selected the Print Both Sides option is automatically disabled e When attempting to print a two page document if Print Back Side Only is selected the first page of the document will print on the backside of the card e The second page of the document will then be printed on the back of a second card Print Bath Sides Disable Printing Spiti Set of Ribbon Panel M Rotate Back 180 Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 26 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Using the Rotate Front 180 Degrees or Rotate Back 180 Degrees options Fargo Electronics Inc Use this option to change the position of the printed image in relation to the set location of a card s Magnetic Stripe or smart chip Step Procedure 1 Select the Rotate Front 180 Degrees option to rotate the image on the front of the card by 180 degrees when printed OR Select the Rotate Back 180 Degrees option to rotate the image on the back of the card by 180 degrees when printed Iv Print Both Sides Disable Printing Split 1 Set of Ribbon Panels Print Back Side First DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 27 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Disable Printing option Use this option to disable the printing capabilities of the Printer Note This option still allows
276. s installed on the computer hard Drive that run the System computer s operations and applications The Driver used for any given OS will differ from other platforms The correct version Driver must be loaded for the Printer to interface with the OS and the application to print Output Any product of the Printer including card image encoded data and lamination Output Hopper The portion of the Printer that accepts the completed cards Overlay A resin like substance that is transferred by the Printhead to the card surface over a printed dye image to prevent image fading increase abrasion durability and prevent dye migration DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Continued on the next page 15 12 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Glossary of Terms continued Term Definition Oversized Cards Oversized cards are used for more efficient visual identification and are available in many non standard sizes The most popular sizes are CR 90 3 63 x 2 37 92mm x 60mm and CR 100 3 88 x 2 63 98 5mm x 67mm Overlaminate Protective clear or holographic material to increase security and durability applied over the printed surface with a hot Roller Thin Film Overlaminate A 0 25 mil thick resin material that enhances card security and durability applied over the printed surface with a hot Roller Available as clear or with embedded holographic type secur
277. specified To prevent equipment or media damage take jewelry off of fingers and hands as well as thoroughly clean hands to remove oil and debris before working on the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 7 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Encoders Cleaning Kit Part Number 085976 A Caution As with any electronic device internal components of the Printer such as the Printhead may be damaged if exposed to static electrical discharges To avoid potential damage always wear an appropriate personal grounding device such as a wrist strap with integral resistor connected to an ESD ground Supplies included with the Cleaning Kit This Cleaning Kit provides you with the specialized cleaning supplies and the required cleaning procedures for you to maintain your Fargo DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Encoders The following cleaning procedures will require less than ten minutes For more thorough cleaning instructions please refer to the Cleaning Section in the appropriate User Guide Four 4 Printhead Cleaning Swabs are pre moistened with 99 99 isopropyl alcohol for cleaning your Printer s Printhead Ten 10 Gauze Pads are pre moistened with 99 99 isopropyl alcohol for cleaning your Printer s interior and exterior 10 Cleaning Cards are provided with adhesive backing for cleaning your Printer s Platen and Card Feed Roll
278. stalled e Driver Monitor Error Display No Flipper Module DTC400 Card Prinber Sc Ls Flipper Module Tha Prireer is unable ba cammurieste wilh the Flipper ihe Flipper Module iy connected ta the printer Flipper Module pieaent hal he Print Beth Sides option mn I enver is seb corecti Preze the bulton an tae F inler Top Cove to conlinue Ta sencel the peine pedi the Cancel Print Bubar fem tie Diners dialap dialog DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 38 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Flipper Jam Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer See the Flipper Table Module Installation section as needed Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom The Flipper Table Module is jamming e Printer Error State The Flipper Table has jammed while either aligning itself or flipping a card e LCD Error Display Flipper Jam e Driver Monitor Error Display Flipper Jam Card Printer Flipper Jam The Figper Tabe has while ether aligding leek of flipping s cand Open the Printers Fipaing M edoa Lever Clear any cards hithe Fllaping Module by using the Formaid andro Revere Guanes located cn the Printers Tap Gaver Bar iha Fliper edule Clase the Printers Flipping
279. ster core and offers high durability e Both types of UltraCards produce printed images with a glossy photo quality finish DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 14 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Printer Module Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 The Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 is an automated Flipping Module that allows the Printer to print on the frontside and backside of each card Display Flipper Table Module Assembly Here are references within this document e See the Installing the Flipper Table Module Assembly 0900200 procedure e See the Flipper Table Module Assembly Problems procedures See the Print Both Sides option in the Using the Device Options tab DTC400 DTC300 section e See the Front and Back radio buttons in the Using the Overlay Print Area tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M section See the Front and Back radio buttons in the Using the Panel Resin tab DTC400 DTC300 section e See the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual for the replacement procedures for this Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 2 15 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Section 3 Secure Print Security Suite Overview SecureMark is a multi faceted security solution that has been designed for Fargo Electronics our Import Suppliers their Integrators and our Printer customers The SecureMark Media is the
280. t Panrcmearz amp Werra Trout nere Arriet Bergishs Preterm Goniast Tach Support Horm This Web ste iz designed supped you snd your FARGO Panter Downlcad porter dwari ponte users guides anc ioudteshorting infomation Crfrz an Pucci sc ferire Pajer in sem Fou don find what pou need piesze coches ys and send get back to you nght aea Tech Suppers Wew d end cere DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 6 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 5 Click on the Printer name under Printer Firmware to begin the download as shown below l Date of File Size OTE ADO Firmvearg v1 1 1 10 21 2004 124 KB DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 12 7 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Downloading Firmware continued Step Procedure 6 Click on the Save button to save the file as shown below File Download z x Some tiles can harm your computer IF the file information below looks suspicious or you do nat fully trust the source do not open or save this file File name DTC400300v111 exe File type Application From WAL Fargo com its This type of file could harm your computer if it contains malicious code Woul
281. t 3957105 Library ode 2439 554 Mike Berman Student 3957105 Library Code DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 44 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving Ribbon Wrinkle problems All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Printed cards have off colored lines or streaks on them e Printer Error State None LCD Error Display None e Driver Monitor Error Display None 2 Confirm that the Printer is using the most current Driver via http www fargo com 3 Reduce the Dye Sub Intensity setting within the Image Color tab of the Printer Driver See the Using the Image Color tab DTC400 DTC300 xt prca00 Card Printer Printing Preference a xl Magnate Encodna Overy Pintaa KPasalResin Printer Supplies Cad Options Image Col Calibrate Ne pint pue Gamma Serra reer 0 4 YelouB rme aR Balarce x 5 Cyan Balaren 42 5 Diver Sub Irbenziy DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 45 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving Ribbon Wrinkle problems continued Step Procedure 4 Reduce the Image Darkness See the Using the Image Darkness Option procedure Mike Berman senior
282. t End Cap See Replacing the Output Door Assembly 0900092 See Replacing the Left End Cap 0900064 Remove the Top Cover Assembly See Replacing the Top Cover Assembly see page 8 39 Remove the Platen Roller See Replacing the Platen Roller 0900041 Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 77 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Ribbon LED Sensor Assembly A000374 and D900138 continued Steps Procedure 7 Disconnect the Ribbon Sensor LED cable 8 Use a Torx T 10 screwdriver to remove the two 2 screws F0001778 that secure the Ribbon LED Sensor to the Printer 9 Replace the Sensor A000374 and D900138 10 Reverse to reassemble LED Sensor Board Bracket 3mm Flat Washer 140040 09000138 P Screw F000178 Spring Holder Block 09000142 PCD Tape Assembly A000375 Ribbon Roller Bearing 760219 PCB LED Sensor Assembly 8000374 Front Sideplate 0900014 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 78 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley D900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub D900090 Refer to Drawings D900077 and D900110 Tools Needed Torx T 10 Screwdriver Retaining Ring Pliers Flat Head Screwdriver Parts Needed RFID Sensor
283. tepper Iviotor Rus Reverse the Stepper Motor Re the Card Input Roller Remove Cards Ra Advance the Ribbon Motor Remove Ribbon Ru Reverse the Ribbon Drive Mator Remove Ribbon RH Magnetic TOF Callbrate Hico Re Magnetic TOF Calibrate Logo DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Diagnostic Utility tabs Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility Step Procedure 1 Select the Print Spooler tab as shown below gt Fargo Diagnostics Utility i i re RGO Select a printer Continue DTC30O Card Printer m ee Sees Dad Sampler Magrete Encoding ere Select File File Name Nore Selected Send Fie Copies fi E DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 4 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Print Spooler tab in the Diagnostics Utility continued Step Procedure 2 Click on the Select File button to bring up the Browse for Print File window as shown below and on the next page Fargo Diagnostics Utility Setta 5 amples Magnetic Encoding Print f Fiuwaie Updates Select Fia File Name Mone Selected Send File Cops fi 4 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 11 5 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electroni
284. tes Steps Procedure BAN Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer 2 a Remove the one 1 screw connecting the Magnetic Door Cover D900107 b Pull out the Magnetic Encoder Assembly D900050 See below 3 Remove and replace the Magnetic Head Assembly D900050 See next page 4 Reverse to re assemble Continued on the next page DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 75 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the Magnetic Module Door D900107 continued Rear Cover 0900066 Screw 130984 Magnetic Door D9000107 Screw 130948 Screws 130984 Screw 130883 Access Cover 0900029 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 76 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Sensor Replacement Replacing the Ribbon LED Sensor Assembly A000374 and D900138 Refer to Drawings D900078 Tools Needed Phillips Head Screwdriver Estimated Repair Time 5 minutes Steps Procedure A Caution Turn off the Printer and unplug the power cord from the Printer Remove the Rear Cover See Replacing the Rear Cover D900066 Remove the Input Door and Right End Cap See Replacing the Input Door Assembly D900148 See Replacing the Right End Cap D900065 01 and 02 Remove the Card Output Door and Lef
285. tha printer i amply inalala Alben caica alek en Cenaa Filet DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 23 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a No Ribbon Installed Error All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information Symptom Printer errors out as soon as it receives data from PC e Printer Error State The Printer RFID Sensor is not receiving a signal from the Ribbon e LCD Error Display No Ribbon e Driver Monitor Error Display No Ribbon Installed Card Printer AM Ribbon Installed Ma pintar inalala enti esd Farga ard to pint Te aenea dkk an Cancel Pili DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 24 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving a No Ribbon Installed Error continued Step Procedure 2 Verify that a Ribbon Cartridge is installed in the Printer a Press on the Resume button b Ifthe issue persists continue to Step 3 Remove the rear cover and check that the Ribbon RFID cable is securely connected to the Main Board J 5 and the RFID Sensor e lf the connections are loose reattach them e Press on the Resume button e If the connections are good or if the issue persists continue to Step 4
286. the Printer to encode cards Step Description 1 Select this option to encode or re encode cards to save time and avoid the use of printing supplies Note When this option is selected no print data will not be sent to the Printer All encoding instructions will be sent according to how they are configured within the software DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences ajx Magnetic Encoding Overlay Print Area Panel Resin Printer Supplies Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Ribbon Type KEG Full Color Resin Black verlag Auto Ribbon Select Color Matching Sustem Color Management Resin Dither Optimized for Graphics i Print Both Sides Split 7 Set of Ribbon Panels Print Back Side First Print Back Side Only v Rotate Front 160 Degrees M Rotate Back TBU Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 28 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Device Options tab DTC300M Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC300M The DTC300M window with the Device Options tab is displayed below Note The DTC400 Printer now has frontside and backside options as shown below f DTE300M Card Printer Printing Preferences M agnetio E raog Printer S upeles Hibbon 20 Premium Ab Abbor Selec Optinized 101 Graphics Resin Heat Fioni u mem 05 Dither Resin H
287. tings dialog box via the Settings button on the Calibrate tab Use the adjustment mode to change the Printer s internal settings Note The Card Printer is equipped with an internal adjustment mode programmable through the Settings dialog box This dialog box is accessible only if the Printer is powered ON it is in Ready Mode and it is properly connected to the PC A Caution These settings are optimized at the factory In most cases these settings can be used without changing them 1 Card Printer Printing Preferences Magec Encodng vele Print Aree Device Options DTC300 Card Printer Calibration Utility piae iiTepdfom x fas s bo _ Werestm Hia h h h 4 Ashore ere DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 105 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Image Darkness Option Use this option to set the overall darkness of the printed image by increasing or decreasing the amount of heat used by the Printhead when printing Step Procedure 1 Lighten the printed image by clicking the down arrow to enter a negative value and decrease the amount of Printhead heat OR Darken the image by clicking the up arrow to enter a positive value and increase the amount of Printhead
288. tion 3 Load up to 100 cards into the Hopper with the print side down If using cards with a magnetic strip the magnetic strip should be loaded with the strip up and to the front of the Printer as shown in Display C in this section 4 Close the Card Hopper Cover to release the Card Tray Continued on the next page Display A This is a graphics showing how to insert the cards DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 10 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing Blank Cards into the Card Hopper continued Display B Press the Card Hopper Load Lever down Insert the cards Here the Lever is still up DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Installing Blank Cards into the Card Hopper continued Here are the cards ready to insert DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Fargo Electronics Inc 4 12 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Lowering the Card Output Hopper Step Procedure 1 The Fargo DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M comes with a Card Output Hopper to hold cards after they have been printed Pull the Output Hopper down until it snaps into place DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Flipper Table Module Installation Additional related links are provided below e See the Flipper Table Module
289. tion with any application program that supports a multiple page document with duplex printing Note The program must be able to send down two or more separate pages to be printed within the same document e Page 1 will be transferred to the front side of the card e Page 2 will be transferred to the backside of the card Note The Printer Driver will always place all odd numbered pages on the front side of the card and all even numbered pages on the back side with this option selected If an odd number of pages are printed to the Driver while this option is selected then the Printer will print an additional blank side and transfer it to the card Disable Printing Print Back Side First Print Back Side Only Rotate Front 180 Degrees Rotate Back 180 Degrees DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 23 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Split 1 Set of Ribbon Panels option Use this option to provide the most economical means of printing a dual sided card since a single set of Ribbon Panels will be split to print both the front and backsides of a card Step Procedure 1 Select this option to automatically print full color on the front of a card and resin black on the back of a card using either of the Full color YMCK or YMCKK Print Ribbons e f using the YMCKO Ribbon type the front of the card is printed with the Ribbon s YMC Panels and the
290. to the Single Feed Slot pTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences E XE XH MaonelicEneedng Oveiay Prictdiea Pinte Supplies Card Cai ig EE 114 3 270 1 1 f A C Landenane DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Clean Printer Option continued Step Description 6 Click on the Clean button at the bottom of the window Note The Printer will begin to feed the cleaning card through the card path 7 Reinsert the Print Ribbon and cards after the cleaning procedure has completed Card Printer Hean Printer utility Remove al caids from the Card Hopper Close the Card Hoppar Cover Front Cower and remove the Ribbon Cerindas Remove Ihe pacer backing bolh sides of Deanng Derd Flaca the Cleaning Card Into tee Siege Faad 5 et Cloge Ihe Fiant Cover ard press Ihe Cean button below Enable A emirde v Farga Cleaning 0859267 Fargo Cleaning Cad 85374 Hale The Cleaning roulics wil bein alter al curent pict jobs hawe comoleied DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 14 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Test Print b
291. ton as shown below The foil options are used to control the size of the exclusion area Note When VeriMark is selected a rectangle sized area is excluded HoloMark uses a square sized area 2 Click on the VeriMark radio button below for the rectangle sized area amp f DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences ImegeCok MagneticEncodrg Ovela Frrk uea K Printer Supplies Secuily Wie al Se eur iy Solini E Pep Flint age Oven A Upper Left 71 l een ev Dr te JE t DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 82 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the HoloMark radio button Frontside option only Step Procedure 1 Click on the HoloMark radio button below for the squared area size inches Comm Defined Area r Overlay Print rea Security Options Undefined Areal visual Security Solutions Far Print and Overlay E Upper Left Foriiverau Only C Meri ark For Ent rly Gyerla DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 83 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Reviewing the Custom VeriMark Card Custom Graphic in a 2D foil The custom VeriMark image is stamped on blank standard sized cards You can select one of e
292. tore Defaults to restore the internal default settings at BTCS00 Card Panter Printing Preferences m Megretic Encoding Ovals Print diea K Panel Resin PrirterSupales Cad Options Image Coke Image Position ET A Direction Card Travels through Printer 01300 Card Printer Calibration Unity Defauk incomes dS re Restore Delauks Help DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 49 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Magnetic Encoding tab DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Use this option only if the Printer has an optional Magnetic Stripe Encoding Module installed The following describes these options and the Printer s magnetic encoding process e The Card Printer comes with either a high coercivity factory installed Magnetic Stripe Encoding Module or a low coercivity Module e The Printer cannot encode both types of Magnetic Stripes interchangeably within the same Printer Step Procedure 1 Select the Magnetic Encoding tab to display options for controlling the Magnetic Stripe encoding process amp f DTC300 Card Printer Printing Preferences 1 viceOpliors ImageCokr Magnetic Encoding Queda
293. tronics Inc Adjusting the Ribbon Type option Use the Ribbon Type option to select Print Ribbons Step Description 1 Select the appropriate Print Ribbon Type option from the dropdown menu for the type of Print Ribbon in use e YMCKO Full Color Resin Black Overlay e K Standard Resin e K Premium Resin e Colored Resin e Metallic Resin e KO Premium Resin Overlay uf DTC400 Card Printer Printing Preferences Ih X Magnetic Encoding Overlay Print Area K Panel Resin Printer Supplies Card Device Options Image Color Calibrate Ribbon Type Full Color Resin Black D verlay Full ColorResin Black Overlay d Standard Resin Color Matching B Premium Resin ma gp colored Resin Resin Dither Resin Premium Resin Overlay DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 19 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Selecting the Auto Ribbon Select option Step Description 1 Click on the Auto Ribbon Select button to verify that the Ribbon type selected matches the Ribbon installed in the Printer Note The Printer Driver will change the Ribbon type to the correct setting or validate It will also display a dialog that it has changed the current setting or that the current Ribbon type is correct DTC3O0 Card Printer Printing Preferences MaonelicEncodng Duedas F nt ma Pinte Suoples
294. ule Door D900107 8 76 Sensor Replacement 5 2 ERU Ee cere 8 77 Replacing the Ribbon LED Sensor Assembly A000374 and 0900138 8 77 Replacing the Ribbon LED Sensor Assembly A000374 D900138 continued 8 78 Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley 0900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub D900090 eee eee csesseeecnseteceeecseescneecseaeeesaceeceeesaeeaeeateasens 8 79 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 8 2 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley 0900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub 0900090 continued eee 8 80 Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley 0900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub 0900090 continued seen 8 81 Replacing the RFID Sensor Assembly A000365 Ribbon Encoder Wheel 810492 Encoder Pulley 0900106 and Ribbon Supply Hub D900090 continued sseeeeeeee 8 82 Replacing the Headlift Sensor Assembly D900113 sess 8 83 Replacing the Headlift Sensor Assembly 0900113 continued sese 8 84 Roller Cable Fan Replacement roten tete en eot
295. utton Step Description 1 Click on the Test Print button to send a simple self test print to the Printer Ensure that the YMCKO Ribbon is installed for DTC400 DTC300 or a Premium Resin Ribbon installed for DTC300M Ensure that the computer is effectively communicating with the Printer and that the Printer is functioning properly Ensure that the YMCKOK Ribbon is installed in order for a DTC400 DTC300 Card Printer with a Flipper Table Module to print a dual sided image E ETC 300 Card Prinber Printing P E xxi MagnelicEneodng Dvedas Print dies Prints Supplies Card DayreDp ans lmagecCelr Card Sips cR 30 Cum Frik idie 2 114 Friot beral 3 270 M Bilntalien Poll C Landenane DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 15 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the About button Step Description 1 Click on the About button to open a dialog box containing the copyright and version date code information about this Printer Driver software DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Device Options tab DTC400 DTC300 Reviewing the Device Options tab DTC400 The DTC400 window with the Device Options tab is displayed below Note The DTC400 Printer now h
296. vice Manual Rev 1 3 5 48 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Incomplete Resin Printing problems All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Black resin text and barcodes appear faded or too light e Printer Error State None e LCD Error Display None e Driver Monitor Error Display None 2 Increase the Resin Heat setting within the Image Color tab of the Printer Driver See the Using the Image Color tab DTC400 DTC300 3 Increase the Image Darkness See the Using the Image Darkness Option procedure DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 49 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Resolving the Image Placement problems All Troubleshooting procedures assume that only factory authorized supplies are in use in the Printer This procedure is used to adjust the position of the card in the Print driver and does not change the internal settings of the Printer See Using the Printer Calibration Utility DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M for instructions on changing the Printer s internal settings Step Procedure 1 Review the following information e Symptom Printing is cut off or is not centered on the card or a white border appears e Printer Error State None e LCD Error Display None e Driver Monitor Error Displa
297. viewing the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Boot up Sequence 1 7 Section 2 Specifications 2 1 Table of Contents 2 1 Regulatory Compliances 2 2 Agency Listings 2 3 Technical Specifications 2 3 Visual Security Solutions Specifications 2 6 VeriMarkTM Cards 2 D holographic foil application 2 6 Custom HoloMarkTM Cards 2 6 Visual Security Card Stock Part Numbers 2 6 Visual Security Fargo Certified Overlaminates Special Order in 50 quantity minimum 2 6 Visual Security Card Stock Tolerances 2 6 VeriMarkTM Application Specifications 2 7 HoloMarkTM and Custom HoloMarkTM Application Specifications 2 7 Functional Specifications 2 8 Printer Components Front Cover to USB Port 2 9 Printer Components Print Ribbons 2 10 Printer Components Resin Only Print Ribbons 2 11 Printer Components Dye Sublimation Print Ribbons 2 12 Printer Components Dye Sublimation Resin Print Ribbons 2 13 Printer Components Blank Cards 2 14 Printer Module Flipper Table Module Assembly D900200 2 15 Section 3 Secure Print Security Suite 3 1 Overview 3 1 Print Notification Application 3 1 Security Imaging Application 3 1 Print Diagnostics Application 3 1 Supplies e Ordering Application 3 1 Password Control Application 3 1 Print Security Suite Main Window 3 2 SecureMark Media 3 2 Section 4 Setup and Installation Procedures 4 1 Table of Contents 4 1 Printer Setup and Installation 4 3 Choosing A Good Location 4 3 About Moisture Condensation 4 3 Printer Setup and
298. y Odd Parity Odd Parity Default DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 52 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Magnetic Track Options radio buttons Use the Magnetic Track options for these purposes e Customize the ISO encoded data format for each of the Magnetic Stripe s three tracks e Customize each track independently of the other two e Specify which of the three tracks to customize by selecting one of the three track options Note No 1 After making the required selection the Magnetic Track Options box displays the current set of customization options for the selected track Note No 2 For most applications the default settings for these options do not need to be changed Magnetic Track Options Bit Density 75BPI C 128 BPI v 210 BFI Character Size 5 Bits 7 Bits 8 Bits ASLII Offset NULL SPACE ZERO LAC Generation MaLRC Even Parity Character Parity No Parity Even Parity Odd Parity Shift Data Left Default Odd Parity Intersider GmbH Neelandstraf3e 41 49716 Meppen Telefon 0 59 31 88 39 0 Telefax 0 59 31 88 39 10 team intersider de www intersider de DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 53 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Using the Bit Density radio buttons Use this option to customize the Bit Recording Density Bits per Inch used to encode the
299. y 3 Slide the Ribbon Cartridge into the Printer as shown in this section 4 Raise the front Cover and press the front Cover s black rubber pad or touch pad to secure it Display A Shows the Print Ribbon Cartridge before it is installed or inserted into the Printer The Card Cleaning Roller see arrow is already inserted into the Print Ribbon Cartridge DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 4 8 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Installing the Print Ribbon Cartridge continued Display B Shows direction that Cartridge is inserted in the Printer DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 Fargo Electronics Inc 4 9 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Installing Blank Cards into the Card Hopper The Fargo DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Printer is capable of printing single load cards and multiple feed cards batch mode e To print using single feed simply remove all cards from the Card Hopper leave the Card Hopper door closed and place a card in the single Feed Card Slot which can be used repeatedly e Again the cards should be loaded with the print side down and if applicable the magnetic strip up and towards the front of the Printer To print using Batch mode follow the instructions below Step Procedure 1 Open the Card Hopper Cover 2 Press the Card Hopper Load Lever down until the Card Tray locks into place as shown in Display B in this sec
300. y None 2 Verify if the Image Position option within the Calibrate tab is set correctly or incorrectly a Open the Printer Control Panel from the Computer e f using Windows 98SE Me right click the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Icon and select Properties e f using Windows 2000 XP right click on the DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer and select Printing Preferences b Click on the Calibrate tab c Adjustthe Vertical and or Horizontal Image Position settings based on where the white border is on the card amp DTC3UO Card Printer Printing Preferemcis a xj Misgnshe E ved mn iren k Fre Pre Supper Crd DeexeOpter mee cir Resolving the Image Placement problems continued DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 5 50 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Step Procedure 3 Verify if the Horizontal Image Position Setting is set correctly or incorrectly See the graphic below e If the white border is on the leading edge of the card adjust the Horizontal value by 2 e If the white border is on the trailing edge of the card adjust the Horizontal value by 2 a Click on OK Run a self test c Ifthe white border is diminished continue the adjustment until it is gone Mike Berman Student 3957105 Librar y Code 2439 554 Graphic A
301. ze or page size within the card design program to the exact dimensions of a CR 80 card Note No 2 The Card Size indicates that the Printer accepts standard credit card size CR 80 ISO ID 1 cards The dimensions of the total print area for this card size appear in the Print Width and Print Length areas as shown below W DTC400 Card Printer Printing Preferences xJ Magneio Eneading Overlay P rk Aves E Pare Resin Preter Supplies Card Card Sigs Dewees D ptians Image Cor Print Width 2 114 Print Length 3270 DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1 3 6 9 RESTRICTED USE ONLY Fargo Electronics Inc Adjusting the Orientation Option Step Description 1 Select Portrait under Orientation to cause the card to print in a vertical orientation OR Select Landscape under Orientation to cause the card to print in a horizontal orientation the two Note An icon illustrating a printed card helps represent the difference between g OT C300 Card Printer Printing Preferences gj x Magnetic Encoding Print Ansa Panel Printer Supplies Device Options ImapaCeler Calibre Card Size pehea 2114 Print Lengthy 3 370 Oiiertatian Folat C Landicape lean Flint Tent Frrk Abou DTC400 DTC300 DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual Rev 1

DTC400/DTC300/DTC300M Card Printer Service Manual (Rev. 1.3)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents